/****************************************************************************
**
** This file is part of Qt Creator
**
** Copyright (c) 2011 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
**
** Contact: Nokia Corporation (info@qt.nokia.com)
**
**
** GNU Free Documentation License
**
** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Free
** Documentation License version 1.3 as published by the Free Software
** Foundation and appearing in the file included in the packaging of this
** file.
**
** If you have questions regarding the use of this file, please contact
** Nokia at qt-info@nokia.com.
**
****************************************************************************/
// **********************************************************************
// NOTE: the sections are not ordered by their logical order to avoid
// reshuffling the file each time the index order changes (i.e., often).
// Run the fixnavi.pl script to adjust the links to the index order.
// **********************************************************************
/*!
\contentspage{index.html}{Qt Creator}
\page index.html
\nextpage creator-overview.html
\title Qt Creator Manual
\section1 Version \qtcversion
Qt Creator provides a cross-platform, complete integrated development
environment (IDE) for application developers to create applications for
multiple desktop and mobile device platforms. It is available for Linux,
Mac OS X and Windows operating systems. For more information, see
\l{Operating Systems and Supported Platforms}.
\note Please report bugs and suggestions to the
\l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com}{Qt Bug Tracker}.
You can also join the Qt Creator mailing list at:
\l{http://lists.qt.nokia.com}{http://lists.qt.nokia.com}.
\raw HTML
\endraw
\list
\o \l{Introducing Qt Creator}
\o \l{Qt Creator User Interface}
\o \l{Getting Started}
\list
\o \l{Building and Running an Example Application}
\o \l{Creating a Qt Widget Based Application}
\o \l{Creating a Mobile Application with Qt SDK}
\o \l{Creating a Qt Quick Application}
\endlist
\o \l{Managing Projects}
\list
\o \l{Creating a Project}
\o \l{Opening a Project}
\o \l{Adding Libraries to Projects}
\o \l{Connecting Maemo Devices}
\o \l{Connecting Symbian Devices}
\o \l{Managing Sessions}
\endlist
\o \l{Coding}
\list
\o \l{Using the Editor}
\o \l{Semantic Highlighting}
\o \l{Checking Code Syntax}
\o \l{Completing Code}
\o \l{Finding and Replacing}
\o \l{Refactoring}
\o \l{Using Qt Quick Toolbars}
\o \l{Searching With the Locator}
\o \l{Pasting and Fetching Code Snippets}
\o \l{Using Text Editing Macros}
\o \l{Configuring the Editor}
\o \l{Using FakeVim Mode}
\endlist
\o \l{Developing Application UI}
\list
\o \l{Developing Qt Quick Applications}
\list
\o \l {Creating Qt Quick Projects}
\o \l {Using Qt Quick Designer}
\o \l {Creating Components}
\o \l {Creating Buttons}
\o \l {Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders}
\o \l {Creating Screens}
\o \l {Animating Screens}
\o \l {Adding User Interaction Methods}
\o \l {Exporting Designs from Graphics Software}
\o \l {Implementing Application Logic}
\endlist
\o \l{Developing Widget Based Applications}
\o \l{Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices}
\endlist
\o \l{Building and Running Applications}
\list
\o \l{Building Applications for Multiple Targets}
\o \l{Running Applications on Multiple Targets}
\o \l{Specifying Build Settings}
\list
\o \l{Adding Qt Versions}
\o \l{Adding Tool Chains}
\endlist
\o \l{Specifying Run Settings}
\o \l{Specifying Editor Settings}
\o \l{Specifying Dependencies}
\endlist
\o \l{Debugging}
\list
\o \l{Debugging the Example Application}
\o \l{Launching the Debugger}
\o \l{Interacting with the Debugger}
\o \l{Setting Up Debugger}
\o \l{Using Debugging Helpers}
\o \l{Debugging Qt Quick Projects}
\o \l{Detecting Memory Leaks}
\o \l{Troubleshooting Debugger}
\endlist
\o \l{Deploying Applications to Mobile Devices}
\list
\o \l{Deploying Applications to Symbian Devices}
\o \l{Deploying Applications to Maemo Devices}
\o \l{Publishing Maemo Applications to Extras-devel}
\o \l{Publishing Applications to Ovi Store}
\o \l{Building with Remote Compiler}
\endlist
\o \l{Getting Help}
\o \l{Advanced Use}
\list
\o \l{Operating Systems and Supported Platforms}
\o \l{Adding New Custom Wizards}
\o \l{Setting Up a CMake Project}
\o \l{Setting Up a Generic Project}
\o \l{Using Version Control Systems}
\o \l{Adding Qt Designer Plugins}
\o \l{Using External Tools}
\o \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}
\o \l{Editing MIME Types}
\o \l{Showing Task List Files in the Build Issues Pane}
\o \l{Using Command Line Options}
\o \l{Keyboard Shortcuts}
\endlist
\o \l{FAQ}
\o \l{Tips and Tricks}
\o \l{Known Issues}
\o \l{Glossary}
\o \l{Acknowledgements}
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage index.html
\page creator-overview.html
\nextpage creator-quick-tour.html
\title Introducing Qt Creator
Qt Creator is an integrated development environment (IDE) that provides you with
tools to design and develop applications with the Qt application framework. Qt is designed for
developing applications and user interfaces once and deploying them across several
desktop and mobile operating systems. Qt Creator provides you with tools for
accomplishing your tasks throughout the whole application development life-cycle,
from creating a project to deploying the application on the target platforms.
\image qtcreator-overview.png "Qt Creator overview"
\section1 Cross-platform Development
One of the major advantages of Qt Creator is that it allows a team of developers
to share a project across different development platforms with a common tool
for development and debugging.
The recommended way to build a project is to use a version control system.
Store and edit only project source files and the .pro and .pri files (for qmake)
or CMakeLists.txt and *.cmake files (for CMake). Do not store
files generated by the build system or Qt Creator, such as makefiles,
.pro.user, and object files. Other approaches are possible,
but we recommend that you do not use network resources, for example.
Qt Creator allows you to specify separate build settings
for each development platform. By default, \l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow builds} are used to
keep the build specific files separate from the source.
You can create separate versions of project files to keep platform-dependent
code separate. You can use qmake
\l{http://qt.nokia.com/doc/4.7/qmake-tutorial.html#adding-platform-specific-source-files}{scopes}
to select the file to process depending on which platform qmake is run on.
Items such as open files, breakpoints, and watchers are stored in
sessions. They are not considered to be part of the
information shared across platforms.
\section1 Creating Projects
But why do you need projects? To be able to build and run applications,
Qt Creator needs the same information as a compiler would need. This information
is specified in the project build and run settings.
Creating a project allows you to:
\list
\o Group files together
\o Add custom build steps
\o Include forms and resource files
\o Specify settings for running applications
\endlist
Setting up a new project in Qt Creator is aided by a wizard that guides
you step-by-step through the project creation process. In the first step, you
select the type of the project from the categories: Qt Quick project, Qt widget
project, or other project. Next, you select a location for the project and
specify settings for it.
\image qtcreator-new-qt-quick-project-wizard.png
When you have completed the steps, Qt Creator automatically generates the
project with required headers, source files, user interface descriptions
and project files, as defined by the wizard.
For example, if you choose to create a Qt Quick application, Qt Creator
generates a QML file that you can modify with the integrated \QMLD.
\section2 Adding Libraries
In addition to Qt libraries, you can link your application to other
libraries, such as system libraries or your own libraries. Further, your
own libraries might link to other libraries. To be able to compile your
project, you must add the libraries to your project. This also enables
code completion and syntax highlighting for the libraries.
The procedure of adding a library to a project depends on the build
system that you use.
\section2 Version Control Systems
Qt Creator uses the version control system's command line clients to access
your repositories. The following version control systems are supported:
\list
\o Git
\o Subversion
\o Perforce
\o CVS
\o Mercurial
\o Bazaar
\endlist
The functions available to you in Qt Creator depend on the version control
system. Basic functions are available for all the supported systems. They include
comparing files with the latest versions stored in the repository and displaying the
differences, viewing versioning history and change details, annotating files,
and committing and reverting changes.
\section1 Designing User Interfaces
Qt Creator provides two integrated visual editors, \QMLD and \QD.
\image qtcreator-ui-designers.png "Qt Quick Designer and Qt Designer"
Large high-resolution screens, touch input, and significant graphics power
are becoming common in portable consumer devices, such as mobile
phones, media players, set-top boxes, and netbooks. To fully benefit from
these features and to create intuitive, modern-looking, fluid user interfaces,
you can use \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtquick.html}{Qt Quick}.
Qt Quick consists of a rich set of user interface elements, a declarative
language for describing user interfaces, and a language runtime. A
collection of C++ APIs is used to integrate these high level features with
classic Qt applications.
You can edit QML code in the code editor or in the integrated \QMLD.
The integration includes project management and code completion.
If you need a traditional user interface that is clearly structured and
enforces a platform look and feel, you can use the integrated \QD. You can
compose and customize your widgets or dialogs and test them using different
styles and resolutions.
\section1 Code Editor
As an IDE, Qt Creator differs from a text editor in that it knows how to build and run
applications. It understands the C++ and QML languages as code, not just as plain text. This allows
it to:
\list
\o Enable you to write well formatted code
\o Anticipate what you are going to write and complete the code
\o Display inline error and warning messages
\o Enable you to semantically navigate to classes, functions, and symbols
\o Provide you with context-sensitive help on classes, functions, and symbols
\o Rename symbols in an intelligent way, so that other symbols with the same name
that belong to other scopes are not renamed
\o Show you the locations in code where a function is declared or called
\endlist
You can use the code editor to write code in Qt C++ or in the
QML declarative programming language.
QML is an extension to JavaScript, that provides a mechanism to declaratively build
an object tree of QML elements. QML improves the integration between JavaScript and
Qt's existing QObject based type system, adds support for automatic property bindings
and provides network transparency at the language level.
\section1 Building
Qt Creator is integrated with cross-platform systems for build automation:
qmake and CMake. In addition, you can import generic projects that do not use qmake
or CMake, and specify that Qt Creator ignores your build system.
Qt Creator provides support for building and running Qt applications for
desktop environment (Windows, Linux, and Mac OS) and mobile devices (Symbian and Maemo).
Build settings allow you to quickly switch between build targets.
When you install the \QSDK, the build and run settings for the Maemo and Symbian
targets are set up automatically. However, you need to install and configure some
additional software on the devices to be able to connect to them from the
development PC.
\note The only supported build system for mobile applications in Qt
Creator is qmake.
\section1 Testing
If you install Qt Creator as part of \QSDK, the GNU Symbolic Debugger
is installed automatically and you should be ready to start debugging after
you create a new project. However, you can change the setup to use debugging
tools for Windows, for example.
You can connect mobile devices to your development PC and debug processes
running on the devices.
You can test applications that are intended for mobile devices in the Qt
Simulator and Maemo Emulator, but you also need to test the applications
on real devices.
\section2 Debuggers
Qt Creator is integrated to several external native debuggers:
\list
\o GNU Symbolic Debugger (GDB)
\o Microsoft Console Debugger (CDB)
\o internal JavaScript debugger
\endlist
You can use the Qt Creator \gui Debug mode to inspect the state of your
application while debugging. You can interact with the debugger in several
ways, including the following:
\list
\o Go through a program line-by-line or instruction-by-instruction.
\o Interrupt running programs.
\o Set breakpoints.
\o Examine the contents of the call stack.
\o Examine and modify registers and memory contents of
the debugged program.
\o Examine and modify registers and memory contents of
local and global variables.
\o Examine the list of loaded shared libraries.
\o Create snapshots of the current state of the debugged program
and re-examine them later.
\endlist
Qt Creator displays the raw information provided by the native debuggers
in a clear and concise manner with the goal to simplify the debugging process
as much as possible without losing the power of the native debuggers.
In addition to the generic IDE functionality provided by stack view, views for
locals and watchers, registers, and so on, Qt Creator includes
features to make debugging Qt-based applications easy. The debugger
plugin understands the internal layout of several Qt classes, for
example, QString, the Qt containers, and most importantly QObject
(and classes derived from it), as well as most containers of the C++
Standard Library and some GCC and Symbian extensions. This
deeper understanding is used to present objects of such classes in
a useful way.
\section3 QML Script Console
You can use the Qt Creator \gui Debug mode to inspect the state of
the application while debugging JavaScript functions. You can set breakpoints,
view call stack trace, and examine locals and watchers.
When the application is interrupted by a breakpoint, you can use the \gui {QML
Script Console} to execute JavaScript expressions in the current context. You can
type JavaScript expressions and use them to get information about the state of the
application, such as property values.
If you change property values or add properties in the code editor, the
changes are updated in the running application when they are saved.
\section3 QML Observer
While the application is running, you can use the \gui {QML Observer} view to
explore the object structure, debug animations, and inspect colors. When debugging
complex applications, you can use the observe mode to jump to the position in code
where an element is defined.
\section2 Qt Simulator
You can use the Qt Simulator to test Qt applications that are intended
for mobile devices in an environment similar to that of the device. You
can change the information that the device has about its configuration
and environment.
The Qt Simulator is installed as part of the \QSDK. After it is
installed, you can select it as a build target in Qt Creator.
\section2 Maemo Emulator
The Maemo 5 emulator emulates the Nokia N900 device environment. You can test
applications in conditions practically identical to running the application
on a Nokia N900 device with the software update release 1.3 (V20.2010.36-2).
However, it is faster to test on a real device connected to the development
PC.
The Maemo Emulator is installed as part of the \QSDK. After it is
installed, you can start it from Qt Creator.
\section1 Deploying
Qt Creator deploy configurations handle the packaging of the application as an
executable and copying it to a location developers want to run the executable at.
The files can be copied to a location in the file system of the development PC
or to a mobile device.
Qt Creator allows you to create installation packages for Symbian and Maemo
devices that are suitable for publishing on Ovi Store and other channels.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-advanced.html
\page creator-os-supported-platforms.html
\nextpage creator-project-wizards.html
\title Operating Systems and Supported Platforms
\section1 Operating Systems
Qt Creator is available in binary packages for the following operating
systems:
\list
\o Windows 7
\o Windows XP Service Pack 2
\o Windows Vista
\o (K)Ubuntu Linux 8.04 (32-bit and 64-bit) or later, with the following:
\list
\o g++
\o make
\o libglib2.0-dev
\o libSM-dev
\o libxrender-dev
\o libfontconfig1-dev
\o libxext-dev
\o libfreetype6-dev
\o libx11-dev
\o libxcursor-dev
\o libxfixes-dev
\o libxft-dev
\o libxi-dev
\o libxrandr-dev
\o If you are using QtOpenGL, libgl-dev and libglu-dev
\endlist
\o Mac OS 10.5 or later with the following:
\list
\o Xcode tools for your Mac OS X version available from your Mac
OS X installation DVDs or at \l http://developer.apple.com.
\endlist
\endlist
\omit ## Are the Xcode tools still needed separately? \endomit
\section1 Compiling Qt Creator from Source
To build Qt Creator itself from the source, see the requirements and
instructions in the readme file that is located in the source repository.
\section1 Supported Platforms
You can develop applications for the following platforms:
\list
\o Desktop
\o Qt Simulator
\o Maemo 5
\o Symbian
\endlist
The following table summarizes operating system support for developing
applications for mobile device platforms.
\table
\header
\o {1,4} Operating system
\o {4,1} Platform
\header
\o Desktop
\o Qt Simulator
\o Maemo
\o Symbian
\row
\o Windows
\o Yes
\o Yes
\o Yes
\o Yes
\row
\o Linux
\o Yes
\o Yes
\o Yes
\o Yes (by using Remote Compiler for building)
\row
\o Mac OS X
\o Yes
\o Yes
\o Yes
\o Yes (by using Remote Compiler for building)
\endtable
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-overview.html
\page creator-quick-tour.html
\nextpage creator-getting-started.html
\title Qt Creator User Interface
\image qtcreator-breakdown.png
When you start Qt Creator, it opens to the \gui Welcome mode, where you can:
\list
\o Open tutorials and example projects
\o View tips and hints on using Qt Creator
\o Create and open projects
\o Send feedback to the development team
\o Open recent sessions and projects
\o Read news from the Qt labs
\o Ask for support
\endlist
You can use the mode selector to change to another Qt Creator mode.
The following image displays an example application in \gui Edit mode
and \gui Design mode.
\image qtcreator-qt-quick-editors.png "Edit mode and Design mode"
Qt Creator has been localized into several languages. If the system language
is one of the supported languages, it is automatically selected. To change
the language, select \gui {Tools > Options > Environment} and select a language
in the \gui Language field. The change takes effect after you restart Qt Creator.
\section1 Qt Creator Modes
The mode selector allows you to quickly switch between tasks such as
editing project and source files, designing application UIs,
configuring how projects are built and
executed, and debugging your applications. To change modes, click the
icons, or use the \l{keyboard-shortcuts}{corresponding keyboard shortcut}.
You can use Qt Creator in the following modes:
\list
\o \gui Welcome mode for opening projects.
\o \gui{\l{Using the Editor}{Edit}} mode for editing project and source files.
\o \gui{\l{Developing Application UI}{Design}} mode for designing and developing
application user interfaces. This mode is available for UI files (.ui or
.qml).
\o \gui{\l{Debugging}{Debug}} mode for inspecting the state of your program while
debugging.
\o \gui{\l{Specifying Build Settings}{Projects}} mode for configuring project building and
execution. This mode is available when a project is open.
\o \gui{\l{Getting Help}{Help}} mode for viewing Qt documentation.
\endlist
Certain actions in Qt Creator trigger a mode change. Clicking on
\gui {Debug} > \gui {Start Debugging} > \gui {Start Debugging}
automatically switches to \gui {Debug} mode.
\section1 Browsing Project Contents
The sidebar is available in the \gui Edit and \gui Debug modes.
Use the sidebar to browse projects, files, and bookmarks, and to view
the class hierarchy.
\image qtcreator-sidebar.png
You can select the content of the sidebar in the sidebar menu:
\list
\o \gui Projects shows a list of projects open in the current
session.
\o \gui{Open Documents} shows currently open files.
\o \gui Bookmarks shows all bookmarks for the current session.
\o \gui{File System} shows all files in the currently selected
directory.
\o \gui {Class View} shows the class hierarchy of the currently
open projects.
\o \gui Outline shows the symbol hierachy of a C++ file and the element hierarchy of a QML file.
\o \gui {Type Hierarchy} shows the base classes of a class.
\endlist
You can change the view of the sidebar in the following ways:
\list
\o To toggle the sidebar, click \inlineimage qtcreator-togglebutton.png
or press \key Alt+0 (\key Cmd+0 on Mac OS X).
\o To split the sidebar, click \inlineimage qtcreator-splitbar.png
. Select new content to view in the split view.
\o To close a sidebar view, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-closesidebar.png
.
\endlist
The additional options in each view are described in the following
sections.
\section2 Viewing Project Files
The sidebar displays projects in a project tree. The project tree contains
a list of all projects open in the current session. The files for each
project are grouped according to their file type.
You can use the project tree in the following ways:
\list
\o To bring up a context menu containing the actions most commonly
needed right-click an item in the project tree.
For example, through the menu of the project root directory you can,
among other actions, build, re-build, clean and run the project.
\o To hide the categories and sort project files alphabetically, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
and select \gui{Simplify Tree}.
\o To hide source files which are automatically generated by the build
system, during a build, click \inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
and select \gui{Hide Generated Files}.
\o To keep the position in the project tree synchronized with the file
currently opened in the editor, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-synchronizefocus.png
.
\o To see the absolute path of a file, move the mouse pointer over the
file name.
\endlist
\section2 Viewing the File System
If you cannot see a file in the \gui Projects view, switch to the
\gui {File System} view, which shows all the files in the file system.
To keep the position in the tree synchronized with the file
opened in the editor, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-synchronizefocus.png
.
\section2 Viewing the Class Hierarchy
The \gui {Class View} shows the class hierarchy of the currently
open projects. To organize the view by subprojects, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-show-subprojects.png
.
\section2 Viewing QML Elements
The \gui Outline view shows the element hierarchy in a QML file.
\list
\o To see a complete list of all bindings, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
and select \gui{Show All Bindings}.
\o To keep the position in the view synchronized with the element
selected in the editor, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-synchronizefocus.png
.
\endlist
\section2 Viewing Type Hierarchy
To view the base classes of a class, right-click the class and select
\gui {Open Type Hierarchy} or press \key {Ctrl+Shift+T}.
\section1 Viewing Output
The task pane in Qt Creator can display one of the following panes:
\list
\o \gui{Build Issues}
\o \gui{Search Results}
\o \gui{Application Output}
\o \gui{Compile Output}
\o \gui{General Messages}
\o \gui{Analysis}
\o \gui{Version Control}
\endlist
Output panes are available in all \l{Qt Creator modes}{modes}.
Click the name of an output pane to open the pane. To maximize
an open output pane, click the \gui {Maximize Output Pane} button
or press \key {Alt+9}.
To search within the \gui{Application Output} and \gui{Compile Output}
panes, press \key {Ctrl+F} when the pane is active. Enter search
criteria in the \gui Find field and click the left and right arrows to
search down and up in the pane.
To open the \gui{General Messages}, \gui{Analysis}, and \gui{Version Control}
panes, select \gui {Window > Output Panes}.
\section2 Build Issues
The \gui{Build Issues} pane provides a list of errors and warnings
encountered during a build. The pane filters out irrelevant output from
the build tools and presents the issues in an organized way.
Right-clicking on a line brings up a context menu with options to copy
the contents and to show a version control annotation view of the
line that causes the error message.
\image qtcreator-build-issues.png
To view task lists in the \gui{Build Issues} pane, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
and select \gui{My Tasks}. Entries from a task list file (.tasks) are
imported to the pane. Press \key F6 and \key Shift+F6 to jump from one issue
to the next.
For more information about creating task files, see
\l{Showing Task List Files in the Build Issues Pane}.
\section2 Search Results
The \gui{Search Results} pane displays the results for global searches,
for example, searching within a current document, files on disk, or all
projects.
The figure below shows an example search result for all
occurrences of \c textfinder within the \c "/TextFinder" directory.
\image qtcreator-search-pane.png
\section2 Application Output
The \gui{Application Output} pane displays the status of a program when
it is executed, and the debug output.
The figure below shows an example output from qDebug().
\image qtcreator-application-output.png
\section2 Compile Output
The \gui{Compile Output} pane provides all output from the compiler.
The \gui{Compile Output} is a more detailed version of information
displayed in the \gui{Build Issues} pane.
\image qtcreator-compile-pane.png
\section1 Navigating with Keyboard
Qt Creator caters not only to developers who are used to using the mouse,
but also to developers who are more comfortable with the keyboard. A wide
range of \l{keyboard-shortcuts}{keyboard} and
\l{Searching With the Locator}{navigation} shortcuts are available to help
speed up the process of developing your application.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-remote-compiler.html
\page creator-help.html
\nextpage creator-advanced.html
\title Getting Help
Qt Creator comes fully integrated with Qt documentation and
examples using the Qt Help plugin.
\list
\o To view documentation, switch to \gui Help mode.
\o To obtain context sensitive help, move the text cursor to a Qt class
or function and press \key F1. The documentation is displayed in a
pane next to the code editor, or, if there is not enough vertical
space, in the fullscreen \gui Help mode.
\o To select and configure how the documentation is displayed in the
\gui Help mode, select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Help.
\endlist
The following image displays the \gui Search pane in the \gui Help mode.
\image qtcreator-help-search.png
The following image displays the context sensitive help in the \gui Edit
mode.
\image qtcreator-context-sensitive-help.png
\section1 Finding Information in Qt Documentation
Qt Creator, \QSDK and other Qt deliverables contain documentation
as .qch files. All the documentation is accessible in the \gui Help mode.
To find information in the documentation, select:
\list
\o \gui Bookmarks to view a list of pages on which you have added bookmarks.
\o \gui Contents to see all the documentation installed on the development
PC and to browse the documentation contents.
\o \gui Index to find information based on a list of keywords in all the
installed documents.
\o \gui {Open Pages} to view a list of currently open documentation pages.
\o \gui Search to search from all the installed documents.
\endlist
\section2 Adding Bookmarks to Help Pages
You can add bookmarks to useful help pages to easily find them later
in the \gui Bookmarks view. You can either use the page title as the
bookmark or change it to any text. You can organize the bookmarks in
folders in the view.
\image qtcreator-help-add-bookmark-dlg.png "Add Bookmark dialog"
To add a bookmark to an open help page:
\list 1
\o Click the
\inlineimage qtcreator-help-add-bookmark.png
(\gui {Add Bookmark}) button on the toolbar.
\o In the \gui {Add Bookmark} dialog, click \gui OK to save the
page title as a bookmark in the \gui Bookmarks folder.
\endlist
To import and export bookmarks, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Help >
General Settings > Import} or \gui Export.
\section1 Adding External Documentation
You can display external documentation in the \gui Help mode.
To augment or replace the documentation that ships with Qt Creator and Qt:
\list 1
\o Create a .qch file from your documentation.
For information on how to prepare your documentation and create a
.qch file, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qthelp-framework.html}{The Qt Help Framework}.
\o To add the .qch file to Qt Creator, select \gui Tools >
\gui Options... > \gui Help > \gui Documentation > \gui Add.
\endlist
\section1 Detaching the Help Window
By default, context-sensitive help is opened in a window next to the
code editor when you press \key F1. If there is not enough vertical
space, the help opens in the full-screen help mode.
You can specify that the help always opens in full-screen mode or
is detached to an external window. Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Help >
General Settings} and specify settings for displaying context-sensitive help
in the \gui {On context help} field. To detach the help window, select
\gui {Always Show Help in External Window}.
You can select the help page to open upon startup in the \gui {Home Page}
field.
\section1 Using Documentation Filters
You can filter the documents displayed in the \gui Help mode to find
relevant information faster. Select from a list of filters in the
\gui {Filtered by} field. The contents of the \gui Index and \gui Contents
pane in the sidebar change accordingly.
\image qtcreator-help-filters.png "Help filters"
You can modify the filters to include external documentation, for example,
or you can define your own filters. To construct filters, you can use the
filter attributes that are specified in the documentation. Each document
contains at least one filter attribute. If several documents contain the
same filter attribute, such as \c tools, you can use that attribute to
include all those documents.
To add filters:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Help > Filters > Add}.
\o Enter a name for the filter and press \gui {OK}.
\o In \gui Attributes, select the documents that you want to include
in the filter.
\image qtcreator-help-filter-attributes.png "Help filter attributes"
\o Click \gui OK.
\o In the \gui Help mode, select the filter in the \gui {Filtered by}
field to see the filtered documentation in the sidebar.
\endlist
To modify filters, select a filter in \gui Filters, select the attributes,
and then click \gui Apply.
To remove filters, select them in \gui Filters, and click \gui Remove.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-fakevim.html
\page creator-design-mode.html
\nextpage creator-visual-editor.html
\title Developing Application UI
Large high-resolution screens, touch input, and significant graphics power
are becoming common in portable consumer devices, such as mobile
phones, media players, set-top boxes, and netbooks. To fully benefit from
these features and to create intuitive, modern-looking, fluid user interfaces,
you can use \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtquick.html}{Qt Quick}.
Qt Quick consists of a rich set of user interface elements, a declarative
language for describing user interfaces, and a language runtime. A
collection of C++ APIs is used to integrate these high level features with
classic Qt applications.
You can edit QML code in the code editor or in the integrated \QMLD.
\image qtcreator-design-mode.png "Design mode"
The integration includes project management and code completion.
If you need a traditional user interface that is clearly structured and
enforces a platform look and feel, you can use the integrated \QD. You can
compose and customize your widgets or dialogs and test them using different
styles and resolutions.
The following sections describe how to develop application UI:
\list
\o \l{Developing Qt Quick Applications}
\o \l{Developing Widget Based Applications}
\o \l{Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices}
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage quick-application-logic.html
\page creator-using-qt-designer.html
\nextpage creator-usability.html
\title Developing Widget Based Applications
Widgets and forms created with \QD are integrated seamlessly with
programmed code by using the Qt signals and slots mechanism that allows you
to easily assign behavior to
graphical elements. All properties set in \QD can be changed dynamically within the code.
Furthermore, features such as widget promotion and custom plugins allow you to use your
own widgets with \QD. For more information, see
\l{Adding Qt Designer Plugins}.
Qt Creator automatically opens all .ui files in the integrated \QD, in
\gui Design mode.
\image qtcreator-formedit.png
For more information about \QD, see the
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/designer-manual.html}{Qt Designer Manual}.
Generally, the integrated \QD contains the same functions as the standalone
\QD. The following sections describe the differences.
\section1 Code Editor Integration
To switch between forms (\gui Design mode) and code (\gui Edit mode),
press \key Shift+F4.
You can use Qt Creator to create stub implementations of slot functions.
In the \gui Design mode, right-click a widget to open a context menu, and
then select \gui {Go to Slot...}. Select a signal in the list to go to an
existing slot function or to create a new slot function.
\section1 Managing Image Resources
In standalone \QD, image resources are created using the built-in
\gui {Resource Editor}. In Qt Creator, .ui files are usually part of a
project, which may contain several resource files (.qrc). They are created
and maintained by using the Qt Creator Resource Editor. The \QD
\gui {Resource Editor} is de-activated and the image resources are
displayed in the \QD \gui {Resource Browser}.
\section1 Specifying Settings for Qt Designer
To change the layout of \QD user interface elements:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui{Form Editor} > \gui Views >
\gui Locked.
When this option is unchecked, you can change the layout.
\o Click the header of an element and drag the element to a new
position.
\endlist
To specify settings for \QD:
\list
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Designer.
\o Specify settins for generating classes and code in \gui {Class
Generation}.
\o Specify embedded device profiles, that determine style, font, and
screen resolution, for example, in \gui{Embedded Design}.
\o Specify settings for the grid and previewing forms in \gui Forms.
\o Specify an additional folder for saving templates in \gui{Template
Paths}.
\endlist
To preview the settings, select \gui Tools > \gui{Form Editor} >
\gui Preview, or press \key Alt+Shift+R.
\section1 Previewing Forms Using Device Skins
A \e {device skin} is a set of configuration files that describe a mobile
device. It includes a border image that surrounds the form and depicts a
mobile device with its buttons.
To preview your form using device skins:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Designer.
\o Select the \gui{Print/Preview Configuration} check box.
\o In the \gui {Device skin} field, select a device skin.
\o When the form is open in \gui Design mode, press \key Alt+Shift+R.
\o To end the preview, right-click the skin and select \gui Close in
the context menu.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage quick-projects.html
\page creator-using-qt-quick-designer.html
\nextpage quick-components.html
\title Using Qt Quick Designer
You can edit .qml files in the \QMLD visual editor or in the
code editor.
In \gui Projects, double-click a .qml file to open it in the code
editor. Then select the \gui {Design} mode to edit the file in the
visual editor.
\image qmldesigner-visual-editor.png "Visual editor"
Use the visual editor panes to manage your project:
\list
\o \gui {Navigator} pane displays the QML elements in the current QML file
as tree structure.
\o \gui {Library} pane displays the building blocks that you can use to design
applications: predefined QML elements, your own QML components, and other
resources.
\o \gui Canvas is the working area where you create QML components and
design applications.
\o \gui {Properties} pane organizes the properties of the selected QML element
or QML component. You can also change the properties in the code editor.
\o \gui {State} pane displays the different states of the component. QML
states typically describe user interface configurations, such as the UI
elements, their properties and behavior and the available actions.
\endlist
\section1 Managing Element Hierarchy
The \gui Navigator pane displays the
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativeelements.html}{QML elements}
in the current QML file and their relationships.
Elements are listed in a tree structure, below their parent.
\image qmldesigner-navigator.png "Navigator pane"
You can select elements in the \gui Navigator to edit their properties
in the \gui Properties pane. Elements can access the properties of their
parent element.
Typically, child elements are located within the parent element on the
canvas. However, they do not necessarily have to fit inside the parent element.
For example, you might want to make a mouse area larger than the rectangle
or image beneath it.
\image qmldesigner-element-size.png "Mouse area for a button"
When you copy an element, all its child elements are also copied. When
you remove an element, the child elements are also removed.
You can show and hide items to focus on specific parts of the application.
Click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-show-hide-icon.png
icon to change the visibility of an element on the canvas. To change the
visibility of an element in the application, use the \gui Visibility
check box or the \gui Opacity field in the \gui Properties pane. If you set
\gui Opacity to 0, elements are hidden, but you can still apply animation
to them.
As all properties, visibility and opacity are inherited from the parent
element. To hide or show child elements, edit the properties of the
parent element.
To view lists of files or projects, instead, select \gui {File System},
\gui {Open Documents}, or \gui Projects in the menu.
To view several types of content at a time, split the sidebar by clicking
\inlineimage qtcreator-splitbar.png
.
\section2 Switching Parent Elements
When you drag and drop QML elements to the canvas, Qt Quick Designer
adds the new element as a child of the element beneath it.
When you move elements on the canvas, Qt Quick Designer cannot determine
whether you want to adjust their position or attach them to a new
parent element. Therefore, the parent element is not automatically
changed. To change the parent of the element, press down the \key Shift
key before you drag and drop the element into a new position. The topmost
element under the cursor becomes the new parent of the element.
You can change the parent of an element also in the \gui Navigator pane.
Drag and drop the element to another position in the tree.
\section1 Element Library
The \gui {Library} pane contains two tabs: \gui {Items} and \gui {Resources}.
The \gui Items pane displays the QML elements grouped by type: your own QML
components, basic elements, interaction elements, views, and widgets.
\omit
Sets of UI components with the MeeGo and Symbian look and feel have been
defined for Qt Quick. They are based on standard QML elements. To view the
UI components in \gui {QML Components}, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
and select \gui {MeeGo Components} or \gui {Symbian Components}.
\endomit
\image qmldesigner-qml-components.png "QML Components pane"
The \gui {Resources} pane displays the images and other files that you copy to
the project folder (to the same subfolder as the QML files).
\section1 Specifying Element Properties
The \gui Properties pane displays all the properties of the selected QML element.
The properties are grouped by type. The top part of the pane displays properties
that are common to all elements, such as element type, position, size,
and visibility.
The bottom part of the pane displays properties that are specific to each element
type. For example, the following image displays the properties you can set for
\gui Rectangle and \gui Text elements.
\image qmldesigner-element-properties.png
The default values of properties are displayed in white color, while the values
that you specify explicitly are highlighted with blue color. In addition, property
changes in states are highlighted with blue.
For more information on the properties available for an element, press \key {F1}.
\section2 Setting Expressions
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/propertybinding.html}{Property binding}
is a declarative way of specifying the value of a property.
Binding allows a property value to be expressed as an JavaScript expression
that defines the value relative to other property values or data accessible
in the application. The property value is automatically kept up to date if
the other properties or data values change.
Property bindings are created implicitly in QML whenever a property is assigned
an JavaScript expression. To set JavaScript expressions as values of properties
in Qt Quick Designer, click the circle
icon next to a property to open a context menu, and select \gui {Set Expression}.
\image qmldesigner-set-expression.png "Element properties context menu"
To remove expressions, select \gui Reset in the context menu.
For more information on the JavaScript environment provided by QML, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativejavascript.html}{Integrating JavaScript}.
\section2 Loading Placeholder Data
Often, QML applications are prototyped with fake data that is later
replaced by real data sources from C++ plugins. QML Viewer loads fake data
into the application context: it looks for a directory named \e dummydata
in the same directory as the target QML file, loads any .qml files in that
directory as QML objects, and binds them to the root context as properties.
For more information, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/latest/qmlviewer.html}{QML Viewer}.
You can use dummydata files also to specify fake properties for QML
components that you open for editing in \QMLD.
A QML component provides a way of defining a new UI element that you can
re-use in other QML files. A component is generally defined in its own QML
file. You can use property binding to specify the properties of a component
to make it easily reusable.
For example, you can create a button bar component (buttonbar.qml) that
inherits its width from the screen that is its parent:
\code
import QtQuick 1.0
Item {
width: parent.width
}
\endcode
However, when you open the QML file for editing in \QMLD, the button bar
component does not have a width, because it is specified outside the QML
file (in the QML file that specifies the screen). To specify a fake width
for the component, create a \c _dummydata.qml file (here,
buttonbar_dummydata.qml) that specifies the component width and copy it to
the \c dummydata directory.
For example:
\code
import QtQuick 1.0
import QmlDesigner 1.0
DummyContextObject {
parent: QtObject {
property real width: 1000
}
}
\endcode
The file is reloaded if you change it.
\section2 Setting Anchors and Margins
In addition to arranging elements in a grid, row, or column, you can use
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-anchor-layout.html}{anchors} to lay out screens.
In an anchor-based layout, each item can be thought of as having a set of
invisible \e anchor lines: top, bottom, left, right, fill, horizontal center,
vertical center, and baseline.
In the \gui Layout pane you can set anchors and margins for elements. To set
the anchors of an item, click the anchor buttons. You can combine the top/bottom,
left/right, and horizontal/vertical anchors to anchor objects in the corners of
the parent element or center them horizontally or vertically within the parent
element.
\image qmldesigner-anchor-buttons.png "Anchor buttons"
In version 2.1, specifying the baseline anchor in Qt Quick Designer is
not supported. You can specify it using the code editor.
For performance reasons, you can only anchor an element to its siblings and
direct parent. By default, an element is anchored to its parent when you
use the anchor buttons. Select a sibling of the element in the \gui Target
field to anchor to it, instead.
Arbitrary anchoring is not supported. For example, you cannot specify:
\c {anchor.left: parent.right}. You have to specify: \c {anchor.left: parent.left}.
When you use the anchor buttons, anchors to the parent element are always
specified to the same side. However, anchors to sibling elements are specified
to the opposite side: \c {anchor.left: sibling.right}. This allows you to keep
sibling elements together.
In the following image, \gui{Rectangle 2} is anchored to its siblings on its
right and left and to the bottom of its parent.
\image qmldesigner-anchors.png "Anchoring sibling elements"
The anchors for \gui{Rectangle 2} are specified as follows in code:
\qml
Rectangle {
id: rectangle2
anchors.right: rectangle3.left
anchors.rightMargin: 15
anchors.left: rectangle1.right
anchors.leftMargin: 15
anchors.bottom: parent.bottom
anchors.bottomMargin: 15
// ...
}
\endqml
Margins specify the amount of empty space to leave to the outside of an item.
Margins only have meaning for anchors. They do not take any effect when using
other layouts or absolute positioning.
\section2 Building Transformations on Items
The \gui Advanced pane allows you configure advanced transformations, such as
rotation, scale, and translation. You can assign any number of transformations
to an item. Each transformation is applied in order, one at a time.
For more information on Transform elements, see
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-transform.html}{QML Transform Element}.
\section1 Adding States
User interfaces are designed to present different interface configurations
in different scenarios, or to modify their appearances in response to user
interaction. Often, there are a set of changes that are made concurrently,
such that the interface could be seen to be internally changing from one
\e state to another.
This applies generally to interface elements regardless of their complexity.
A photo viewer may initially present images in a grid, and when an image is
clicked, change to a detailed state where the individual image is expanded
and the interface is changed to present new options for image editing.
On the other end of the scale, when a simple button is pressed, it may change
to a \e pressed state in which its color and position is modified to give a
pressed appearance.
In QML, any object can change between different states to apply sets of changes
that modify the properties of relevant items. Each state can present a
different configuration that can, for example:
\list
\o Show some UI elements and hide others.
\o Present different available actions to the user.
\o Start, stop or pause animations.
\o Execute some script required in the new state.
\o Change a property value for a particular item.
\o Show a different view or screen.
\endlist
The \gui State pane displays the different
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativestates.html}{states}
of the component in the Qt Quick Designer.
\image qmldesigner-transitions.png "State pane"
To add states, click the empty slot. Then modify the new state in the editor.
For example, to change the appearance of a button, you can hide the button
image and show another image in its place. Or, to add movement to the screen,
you can change the position of an object on the canvas and then add animation
to the change between the states.
You can preview the states in the \gui State pane and click them to switch
between states on the canvas.
For more information on using states, see \l{Creating Screens}.
If you add animation to the states, you can run the application to test the
animation.
For more information on adding animation, see \l{Animating Screens}.
\section1 Aligning and Positioning Elements
The position of an element on the canvas can be either absolute or relative
to other elements. In the element properties, you can set the x and y
coordinates of an element, or \l{Setting Anchors and Margins}{anchor} it to its
parent and sibling elements.
\section2 Snap to Margins
When you are working on a design, you can use snap and guides to align
elements on the canvas. Click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-snap-to-guides-button.png
button to have the elements snap to the guides.
Choose \gui {Tools > Options... > Qt Quick} to specify settings for snap to
margins. In the \gui {Snap margin} field, specify the position of the guides
as pixels from the edge of the canvas. In the \gui {Item spacing} field,
specify the space in pixels to leave between elements on the screen.
The following image shows the position of the guides when \gui {Snap margin}
is set to 5 pixels.
\image qmldesigner-snap-margins.png "Snap margins on canvas"
\section2 Hiding Element Boundaries
Qt Quick Designer displays the boundaries of elements on the canvas. To hide
the element boundaries, click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-show-bounding-rectangles-button.png
button.
\section2 Selecting Elements
When you point the mouse to overlapping elements, the frontmost element is
selected by default. However, elements that do not have any content, such as
the mouse area, are typically located in front of elements that do have
content, such as rectangles or border images. To select elements with content
by default, click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-only-select-items-with-content.png
button.
\section2 Previewing Element Size
The width and height of the root item in a QML file determine the size of
the QML element. You can reuse elements, such as buttons, in different
sizes in other QML files and design screens for use with different device
profiles, screen resolution, or screen orientation. The component size
might also be zero (0,0) if its final size is determined by property
bindings.
To experiment with different element sizes, enter values in the
\gui Height and \gui Width fields on the canvas toolbar. The changes are
displayed in the \gui States pane and on the canvas, but the property
values are not changed permanently in the QML file. You can permanently
change the property values in the \gui Properties pane.
\image qmldesigner-preview-size.png "Canvas width and height"
\section1 Specifying Canvas Size
To change the canvas size, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Qt Quick} and
specify the canvas width and height in the \gui Canvas group.
\section1 Refreshing the Canvas
When you open QML files in \QMLD, the QML elements in the file are drawn on
the canvas. When you edit the element properties in \QMLD, the QML file and
the image on the canvas might get out of sync. For example, when you change
the position of an item within a column or a row, the new position might
not be displayed correctly on the canvas.
To refresh the image on the canvas, press \key R or select the \gui {Reset
View} button on the canvas toolbar.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-project-managing-sessions.html
\page creator-coding.html
\nextpage creator-editor-using.html
\title Coding
Writing, editing, and navigating in source code are core tasks in
application development. Therefore, the code editor is one of the key
components of Qt Creator. You can use the code editor in the \gui Edit
mode.
The following sections describe coding with Qt Creator:
\list
\o \l{Using the Editor} describes how to work in the code editor, use
the editor toolbar, split the view, add bookmarks, and move between
symbol definitions and declarations.
\o \l{Semantic Highlighting} describes highlighting code elements and
blocks, as well as using syntax highlighting also for other types
of files than C++ or QML.
\o \l{Checking Code Syntax} describes how errors are visualized
while you write code.
\o \l{Completing Code} describes how code and code snippets are
completed for elements, properties, an IDs.
\o \l{Finding and Replacing} describes the incremental search that
highlights the matching strings in the window while typing and the
advanced search that allows you to search from currently open
projects or files on the file system. In addition, you can search
for symbols when you want to refactor code.
\o \l{Refactoring} describes the features that help you improve the
internal quality or your application, its performance and
extendibility, and code readability and maintainability, as well as
to simplify code structure.
\o \l{Using Qt Quick Toolbars} describes how to use the Qt Quick
Toolbars to edit the properties of QML elements in the code editor.
\o \l{Searching With the Locator} describes how to browse through
projects, files, classes, methods, documentation and file systems.
\o \l{Pasting and Fetching Code Snippets} describes how to cooperate
with other developers by pasting and fetching snippets of code from
a server.
\o \l{Using Text Editing Macros} describes how to record and play
text editing macros.
\o \l{Configuring the Editor} describes how to change the text editor
options to suit your specific needs.
\o \l{Using FakeVim Mode} run the main editor in a manner similar to
the Vim editor.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-coding.html
\page creator-editor-using.html
\nextpage creator-highlighting.html
\title Using the Editor
Qt Creator's code editor is designed to aid you in creating, editing and
navigating code. Qt Creator's code editor is fully equipped with syntax
checking, code completion, context sensitive help and in-line error
indicators while you are typing.
\image qtcreator-edit-mode.png "Edit mode"
\section1 Using the Editor Toolbar
The editor toolbar is located at the top of the editor view. The editor
toolbar is context sensitive and shows items relevant to the file currently
open in the editor.
\image qtcreator-editortoolbar-symbols.png
Use the toolbar to navigate between open files and symbols in use.
To browse forward or backward through your location history, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-back.png
and \inlineimage qtcreator-forward.png
.
To go to any open file, select it from the \gui{Open files} drop-down menu.
Right-click the menu title and select \gui {Copy Full Path to Clipboard} to
copy the path and name of the current file to the clipboard.
To jump to any symbol used in the current file, select it from the
\gui Symbols drop-down menu. By default, the symbols are displayed in the
order in which they appear in the file. Right-click the menu title and select
\gui {Sort Alphabetically} to arrange the symbols in alphabetic order.
\section1 Splitting the Editor View
Split the editor view when you want to work on and view multiple files on
the same screen.
\image qtcreator-spliteditorview.png
You can split the editor view in the following ways:
\list
\o To split the editor view into a top and bottom view, select
\gui Window > \gui Split or press \key{Ctrl+E, 2}.
Split command creates views below the currently active editor view.
\o To split the editor view into adjacent views, select
\gui Window > \gui{Split Side by Side} or press
\key{Ctrl+E, 3}.
Side by side split command creates views to the right of the
currently active editor view.
\endlist
To move between split views, select \gui Window >
\gui{Go to Next Split} or press \key{Ctrl+E, O}.
To remove a split view, place the cursor within the view you want to
remove and select \gui Window > \gui{Remove Current Split} or press
\key{Ctrl+E, 0}. To remove all but the currently selected split view,
select \gui Window > \gui{Remove All Splits} or press \key{Ctrl+E, 1}.
\section1 Using Bookmarks
To insert or delete a bookmark right-click the line number and select
\gui{Toggle Bookmark} or press \key{Ctrl+M}.
\image qtcreator-togglebookmark.png
To go to previous bookmark in the current session, press \key{Ctrl+,}.
To go to next bookmark in the current session, press \key{Ctrl+.}.
\section1 Moving to Symbol Definition or Declaration
You can move directly to the definition or the declaration of a symbol by
holding the \key Ctrl and clicking the symbol.
To enable this moving function, in \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
\gui{Text Editor} > \gui Behavior, select \gui{Enable mouse navigation}.
You can also select the symbol and press \key F2, or right-click the symbol
and select \gui {Follow Symbol Under Cursor} to move to its definition or
declaration. This feature is supported for namespaces, classes, methods,
variables, include statements, and macros.
To switch between the definition and declaration of a symbol, press
\key {Shift+F2} or right-click the symbol and select \gui {Switch Between
Method Declaration/Definition}.
\section1 Using Update Code Model
To refresh the internal information in Qt Creator pertaining to your code,
select \gui{Tools} > \gui{C++} > \gui{Update Code Model}.
\note In Qt Creator indexing updates the code automatically. Use
\gui{Update Code Model} only as an emergency command.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-using.html
\page creator-highlighting.html
\nextpage creator-checking-code-syntax.html
\title Semantic Highlighting
Qt Creator understands the C++ and QML languages as code, not as plain text.
It reads the source code, analyzes it, and highlights it based on the
semantic checks that it does for the following code elements:
\list
\o Types (such as classes, structs, and type definitions)
\o Local variables
\o Class fields
\o Virtual methods
\endlist
To specify the color scheme to use for semantic highlighting, select
\gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Fonts & Color}.
Qt Creator supports syntax highlighting also for other types of files than
C++ or QML.
\section1 Generic Highlighting
Generic highlighting is based on highlight definition files that are
provided by the
\l{http://kate-editor.org/2005/03/24/writing-a-syntax-highlighting-file/}{Kate Editor}.
You can download highlight definition files for use with Qt Creator.
If you have a Unix installation that comes with the Kate Editor, you might
already have the definition files installed. Typically, the files are
located in a read-only directory, and therefore, you cannot manage them. Qt
Creator can try to locate them and use them as fallback files, when the
primary location does not contain the definition for the current file type.
You can also specify the directory that contains preinstalled highlight
definition files as the primary location.
When you open a file for editing and the editor cannot find the highlight
definition for it, an alert appears. You can turn off the alerts. You can
also specify patterns for ignoring files. The editor will not alert you if
highlight definitions for the ignored files are not found.
To download highlight definition files:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Generic
Highlighter}.
\image qtcreator-generic-highlighter.png "Generic Highlighter options"
\o In the \gui Location field, specify the path to the primary
location for highlight definition files.
\o Click \gui {Download Definitions} to open a list of highlight
definition files available for download.
\image qtcreator-manage-definitions.png "Download Definitions dialog"
\o Select highlight definition files in the list and click
\gui {Download Selected Definitions}.
\o Select the \gui {Use fallback location} check box to specify the
secondary location where the editor will look for highlight
definition files.
\o Click \gui Autodetect to allow Qt Creator to look for highlight
definition files on your system, or click \gui Browse to locate
them in the file system yourself.
\o In the \gui {Ignored file patterns} field, specify file patterns.
You will not receive alerts if the highlight definitions for the
specified files are not found.
\o Click \gui OK to save your changes.
\endlist
\section1 Highlighting and Folding Blocks
Use block highlighting to visually separate parts of the code that belong
together. For example, when you place the cursor within the braces,
the code enclosed in braces is highlighted.
\image qtcreator-blockhighlighting.png
To enable block highlighting, select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
\gui{Text Editor} > \gui Display > \gui{Highlight blocks}.
Use the folding markers to collapse and expand blocks of code within
braces. Click the folding marker to collapse or expand a block. In the
figure above, the folding markers are located between the line number and
the text pane.
To show the folding markers, select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
\gui{Text Editor} > \gui Display > \gui{Display folding markers}. This
option is enabled by default.
When the cursor is on a brace, the matching brace is animated
by default. To turn off the animation and just highlight the block and
the braces, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Display} and
deselect \gui {Animate matching parentheses}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-highlighting.html
\page creator-checking-code-syntax.html
\nextpage creator-completing-code.html
\title Checking Code Syntax
As you write code Qt Creator checks code syntax. When Qt Creator spots a
syntax error in your code it underlines it and shows error details when you
move the mouse pointer over the error.
\list
\o Syntax errors are underlined in red.
In the following figure, a semicolon is missing at the end of the
line.
\image qtcreator-syntaxerror.png
\o Semantic errors and warnings are underlined in olive.
In the following figure, the type is unknown.
\image qtcreator-semanticerror.png
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-checking-code-syntax.html
\page creator-completing-code.html
\nextpage creator-editor-finding.html
\title Completing Code
As you write code, Qt Creator suggests properties, IDs, and code
snippets to complete the code. It provides a list of context-sensitive
suggestions to the statement currently under your cursor. Press \key Tab
or \key Enter to accept the selected suggestion and complete the code.
\image qtcreator-codecompletion.png
To open the list of suggestions at any time, press \key{Ctrl+Space}.
If only one option is available, Qt Creator inserts it automatically.
When completion is invoked manually, Qt Creator completes the common prefix
of the list of suggestions. This is especially useful for classes with
several similarly named members. To disable this functionality, uncheck
\gui{Autocomplete common prefix} in the code completion preferences.
Select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Text Editor} > \gui Completion.
By default, code completion considers only the first letter case-sensitive.
To apply full or no case-sensitivity, select the option in the
\gui {Case-sensitivity} field.
\section2 Summary of Available Types
The following table lists available types for code completion and icon
used for each.
\table
\header
\o Icon
\o Description
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/class.png
\i A class
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/enum.png
\i An enum
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/enumerator.png
\i An enumerator (value of an enum)
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/func.png
\i A function
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/func_priv.png
\i A private function
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/func_prot.png
\i A protected function
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/var.png
\i A variable
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/var_priv.png
\i A private variable
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/var_prot.png
\i A protected variable
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/signal.png
\i A signal
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/slot.png
\i A slot
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/slot_priv.png
\i A private slot
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/slot_prot.png
\i A protected slot
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/keyword.png
\i A C++ keyword
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/snippet.png
\i A C++ code snippet
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/element.png
\i A QML element
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/qmlsnippet.png
\i A QML code snippet
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/macro.png
\i A macro
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/namespace.png
\i A namespace
\endtable
\section2 Completing Code Snippets
Code snippets can consist of multiple
variables that you specify values for. Select an item in the list and press
\key Tab or \key Enter to complete the code. Press \key Tab to
move between the variables and specify values for them. When you specify a
value for a variable, all instances of the variable within the snippet
are renamed.
\image qmldesigner-code-completion.png "Completing QML code"
\section2 Editing Code Snippets
Code snippets specify C++ or QML code constructs. You can add, modify,
and remove snippets in the snippet editor. To open the editor, select
\gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Snippets}.
\image qtcreator-edit-code-snippets.png "Snippet options"
Qt Creator provides you with built-in snippets in the following categories:
\list
\o Text snippets, which can contain any text string. For example, code
comments
\o C++ code snippets, which specify C++ code constructs
\o QML code snippets, which specify QML code constructs
\endlist
\section3 Adding and Editing Snippets
Select a snippet in the list to edit it in the snippet editor. To add a new
snippet, select \gui Add. Specify a trigger and, if the trigger is already
in use, an optional variant, which appear in the list of suggestions when
you write code. Also specify a text string or C++ or QML code construct in
the snippet editor, depending on the snippet category.
The snippet editor provides you with:
\list
\o Highlighting
\o Indentation
\o Parentheses matching
\o Basic code completion
\endlist
Specify the variables for the snippets in the following format:
\c $variable$
Use unique variable names within a snippet, because all instances of a
variable are renamed when you specify a value for it.
The snippet editor does not check the syntax of the snippets that you edit
or add. However, when you use the snippets, the code editor marks any
errors by underlining them in red.
To discard the changes you made to a built-in snippet, select \gui {Revert
Built-in}.
\section3 Removing Snippets
Several similar built-in snippets might be provided for different use
cases. To make the list of suggestions shorter when you write code, remove
the built-in snippets that you do not need. If you need them later, you
can restore them.
To remove snippets, select a snippet in the list, and then select
\gui Remove. To restore the removed snippets, select \gui {Restore Removed
Built-ins}.
\section3 Resetting Snippets
To remove all added snippets and to restore all removed snippets, select
\gui {Reset All}.
\note If you now select \gui OK or \gui Apply, you permanently lose all
your own snippets.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-locator.html
\page creator-editor-codepasting.html
\nextpage creator-macros.html
\title Pasting and Fetching Code Snippets
In Qt Creator, you can paste snippets of code to a server or fetch
snippets of code from the server. To paste and fetch snippets of code,
Qt Creator uses the following:
\list
\o \gui{CodePaster}
\o \gui{Pastebin.Com}
\o \gui{Pastebin.Ca}
\endlist
To configure the server, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
\gui{Code Pasting}.
To paste a snippet of code onto the server, select \gui{Tools} >
\gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Paste Snippet...} or press \key{Alt+C,Alt+P}.
To fetch a snippet of code from the server, select \gui{Tools} >
\gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Fetch Snippet...} or press \key{Alt+C,Alt+F}.
\note To use \gui{Pastebin.Com}, configure the domain
prefix in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Code Pasting} >
\gui{Pastebin.com}.
For example, you might ask colleagues to review a change that you plan to
submit to a version control system. If you use the Git version control system,
you can create a \e{diff} view by selecting \gui{Tools} > \gui{Git} >
\gui{Diff Repository}. You can then upload its contents to the server by choosing
\gui{Tools} > \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Paste Snippet...}. The reviewers can retrieve
the code snippet by selecting \gui{Tools} > \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Fetch Snippet...}.
If they have the project currently opened in Qt Creator, they can apply and test
the change by choosing \gui{Tools} > \gui{Git} > \gui{Apply Patch}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-codepasting.html
\page creator-macros.html
\nextpage creator-editor-options.html
\title Using Text Editing Macros
When you have a file open in the code editor, you can record a keyboard
sequence as a macro. You can then play the macro to repeat the sequence.
You can save the latest macro and assign a keyboard shortcut for running
it or run it from the locator.
To record a text editing macro, select \gui {Tools > Macros > Record Macro}
or press \key {Alt+(}. To stop recording, select \gui {Tools > Macros >
Stop Recording Macro} or press \key {Alt+)}.
To play the last macro, select \gui {Tools > Macros > Play Last Macro} or
press \key {Alt+R}.
To save the last macro, select \gui {Tools > Macros > Save Last Macro}.
To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text editing macro, select \gui {Tools >
Options... > Environment > Keyboard}. For more information, see
\l{Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts}.
You can also use the \c rm locator filter to run a macro. For more
information, see \l{Searching With the Locator}.
To view and remove saved macros, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Text
Editor > Macros}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-options.html
\page creator-editor-fakevim.html
\nextpage creator-design-mode.html
\title Using FakeVim Mode
In the \gui{FakeVim} mode, you can run the main editor in a manner similar
to the Vim editor. To run the editor in the \gui{FakeVim} mode, select
\gui{Edit} > \gui{Advanced} > \gui{Use Vim-style Editing} or press
\key{Alt+V,Alt+V}.
In the \gui{FakeVim} mode, most keystrokes in the main editor will be
intercepted and interpreted in a way that resembles Vim. Documentation for
Vim is not included in Qt Creator. For more information on using Vim,
see \l{http://www.vim.org/docs.php}{Documentation} on the Vim web site.
To map commands entered on the \gui{FakeVim} command line to actions of the
Qt Creator core, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{FakeVim} >
\gui{Ex Command Mapping}.
To make changes to the Vim-style settings, select \gui{Tools} >
\gui{Options...} > \gui FakeVim > \gui{General}.
To use a Vim-style color scheme, select \gui {Tools > Options... >
Text Editor > Fonts & Color}. In the \gui {Color Scheme} list, select
\gui {Vim (dark)}.
To quit the FakeVim mode, click \gui {Quit FakeVim} or press
\key{Alt+V,Alt+V}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage adding-plugins.html
\page creator-editor-external.html
\nextpage creator-maemo-emulator.html
\title Using External Tools
You can use external tools directly from Qt Creator. Qt Linguist, the
default text editor for your system, and the \c sort tool are preconfigured
for use. You can change their default configurations and configure new
tools.
\section1 Using Qt Linguist
You can use the Qt Linguist release manager tools, lupdate and lrelease,
directly from Qt Creator. The lupdate tool is used to synchronize source
code and translations. The lrelease tool is used to create run-time
translation files for use by the released application.
To synchronize ts files from a translator with the application code,
select \gui {Tools > External > Text > Linguist > Update Translations
(lupdate)}.
To generate from the ts files qm translation files that can be used by an
application, select \gui {Tools > External > Text > Linguist > Release
Translations (lrelease)}.
By default, the project .pro file is passed to the tools as an argument. To
specify other command line arguments for the tools, select \gui {Tools >
External > Configure}.
For more information about Qt Linguist, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/linguist-manual.html}{Qt Linguist Manual}.
\section1 Using External Text Editors
You can open files for editing in the default text editor for your system:
Notepad on Windows and vi on Linux and Mac OS.
To open the file you are currently viewing in an external editor, select
\gui {Tools > External > Text > Notepad} or \gui vi, depending on your
system.
Qt Creator looks for the editor path in the PATH environment variable
of your operating system.
\section1 Sorting Text Alphabetically
To sort selected text alphabetically, select \gui {Tools > External > Text
> Sort Selection}. The \c sort tool takes the selected text as input and
returns it in alphabetic order. By default, the output replaces the
original selection in the code editor.
To change the default configuration, select \gui {Tools > External >
Configure}.
\section1 Configuring External Tools
You can change the configuration of preconfigured tools and configure
additional tools in Qt Creator \gui Options.
You can use Qt Creator variables in the fields that you can select from
lists of available Qt Creator variables.
\image qtcreator-external-tools.png "External Tools options"
To configure external tools:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Tools > External > Configure}.
\o Select \gui {Add > Add Tool}
to add a new tool. You can also select \gui {Add Category} to add a
new category.
\o In the \gui Executable field, specify the executable to run. If the
executable is found in your system PATH variable, do not specify
the path to it.
\o In the \gui Arguments field, specify optional arguments for running
the executable.
\o In the \gui {Working directory} field, specify the path to the
working directory.
\o In the \gui {Output pane}, select how to handle output from the
tool. You can ignore the output, view it in the \gui {General
Messages} output pane, or replace the selected text with the
output in the code editor.
\o In the \gui {Error output pane}, select how to handle error messages
from the tool.
\o In the \gui Input field, specify text that is passed as standard
input to the tool.
\endlist
The category and tool are added to the \gui {Tools > External} menu.
If you change the configuration of preconfigured tools, you can later
revert the changes by selecting the \gui Revert button.
The tool configurations that you add and modify are stored in XML format in
the user configuration folder. For example,
\c {~/config/Nokia/qtcreator/externaltools}
on Linux and Mac OS and
\c {C:\Users\username\AppData\Roaming\Nokia\qtcreator\externaltools}
in Windows. To share a configuration with other users, copy an XML
configuration file to the folder.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-macros.html
\page creator-editor-options.html
\nextpage creator-editor-fakevim.html
\title Configuring the Editor
Qt Creator allows you to configure the text editor to suit your specific
needs. To configure the editor, select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
\gui{Text Editor}.
These settings apply to all projects. To specify editor behavior for an
open project, select \gui {Projects > Editor Settings}. For more
information, see \l{Specifying Editor Settings}.
\image qtcreator-font-colors.png "Text editor options"
You can perform the following configuration actions:
\list
\o Set the font preferences and apply color schemes for syntax highlighting in
\gui{Font & Colors}.
\o Specify
\l{Generic Highlighting}{definition files for syntax highlighting}
for other types of files than
C++ or QML in \gui{Generic Highlighter}.
\o Set tabs, indentation, the handling of whitespace, and mouse operations in
\gui Behavior.
\o Set various display properties, for example,
\l{Highlighting and folding blocks}{highlighting and folding blocks},
text wrapping or \l{Moving to symbol definition or declaration}
{moving to symbol definition or declaration}
in \gui Display.
\o Add, modify, and remove \l{Editing Code Snippets}{code snippets} in
\gui Snippets.
\o View and remove \l{Using Text Editing Macros}{text editing macros}
in \gui Macros.
\o Configure \l{Completing Code}{code completion} in \gui Completion.
\endlist
\section2 Configuring Fonts
You can select the font family and size. You can specify a zoom setting in
percentage for viewing the text. You can also zoom in or out by pressing
\key {Ctrl++} or \key {Ctrl +-}, or by pressing \key Ctrl and rolling
the mouse button up or down. To disable the mouse wheel function, select
\gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Behavior} and deselect the
\gui {Enable scroll wheel zooming} check box.
Antialiasing is used by default to make text look smoother and more
readable on the screen. Deselect the \gui Antialias check box to
turn off antialiasing.
\section2 Defining Color Schemes
You can select one of the predefined color schemes for syntax highlighting
or create customized color schemes. The color schemes apply to highlighting
both C++ and QML files and generic files.
To create a color scheme:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Fonts & Color > Copy}.
\o Enter a name for the color scheme and click \gui OK.
\o In the \gui Foreground field, specify the color of the selected
code element.
\o In the \gui Background field, select the background
color for the code element.
The backgound of the \gui Text element determines the background of the
code editor.
\endlist
When you copy code from Qt Creator, it is copied in both plain text and HTML
format. The latter makes sure that syntax highlighting is preserved when
pasting to a rich-text editor.
\section2 Indenting Code
\image qtcreator-indentation.png "Text Editor Behavior options"
When you type code, it is indented automatically according to the selected
options. Select a block to indent it when you press \key Tab.
Press \key {Shift+Tab} to decrease the indentation.
When you press \gui Backspace the indentation is decreased by one level,
instead of one space, by default.
By default, the tab-length in code editor is 8 spaces, but you can change
it. The code editor can also determine whether tabs or spaces are used
on the previous or next line and copy the style.
You can determine whether the block indent style includes braces,
or you can use the GNU indent style. The GNU style places braces on a separate
line, indented by 2 spaces, except when they open a function definition, where
they are not indented.
You can also specify whether continuation lines are aligned with the previous
code or just indented to the logical depth. You can always use spaces for
alignment or use spaces or tabs depending on the other options you selected.
The following code snippet illustrates excluding braces from the indented block:
\code
void foobar(bool zoo)
{
if (zoo)
{
foo();
}
}
\endcode
The following code snippet illustrates including braces in the indented block:
\code
void foobar(bool zoo)
{
if (zoo)
{
foo();
}
}
\endcode
The following code snippet illustrates the GNU style:
\code
void foobar(bool zoo)
{
if (zoo)
{
foo();
}
}
\endcode
\section2 File Encoding
To define the default file encoding, select the desired encoding in
\gui {Default encoding}. By default, Qt Creator uses the file encoding
used by your system.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-completing-code.html
\page creator-editor-finding.html
\nextpage creator-editor-refactoring.html
\title Finding and Replacing
To search through the currently open file:
\list 1
\o Press \key Ctrl+F or select \gui Edit > \gui Find/Replace >
\gui{Find/Replace}.
\o Enter the text you are looking for.
If the text is found, all occurrences are highlighted as you type.
\o To go to the next occurrence, click \inlineimage qtcreator-next.png
, or press \key F3. To go to the previous occurrence click
\inlineimage qtcreator-previous.png
, or press \key Shift+F3.
\endlist
You can restrict the search in the \gui Find field by selecting one
or several search criteria:
\list
\o To make your search case sensitive, select
\inlineimage qtcreator-editor-casesensitive.png
.
\o To search only whole words, select
\inlineimage qtcreator-editor-wholewords.png
.
\o To search using regular expressions, select
\inlineimage qtcreator-editor-regularexpressions.png
.
Regular expressions used in Qt Creator are modeled on Perl regular
expressions. For more information on using regular expressions, see
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qregexp.html#details}
{Detailed Description} in the QRegExp Class Reference.
\endlist
\note If you have selected text before selecting \gui Find/Replace, the
search is conducted within the selection.
To replace occurrences of the existing text, enter the new text in the
\gui{Replace with} field.
\list
\o To replace the selected occurrence and move to the next one,
click \inlineimage qtcreator-next.png
or press \key Ctrl+=.
\o To replace the selected occurrence and move to the previous one,
click \inlineimage qtcreator-previous.png
.
\o To replace all occurrences in the file, click \gui{Replace All}.
\endlist
\section1 Advanced Search
To search through projects, files on a file system or the currently open
file:
\list 1
\o Press \key Ctrl+Shift+F or select \gui Edit >
\gui Find/Replace > \gui{Advanced Find} >
\gui{Open Advanced Find...}.
\o Select the scope of your search:
\list
\o \gui{All Projects} searches files matching the defined file
pattern in all currently open projects.
For example, to search for \tt previewer only in \tt .cpp
and \tt .h files, enter in \gui{File pattern}
\tt *.cpp,*.h.
\image qtcreator-search-allprojects.png
\o \gui{Current Project} searches files matching the defined file
pattern only in the project you are currently editing.
\o \gui{Files on File System} recursively searches files matching
the defined file pattern in the selected directory.
\o \gui{Current File} searches only the current file.
\endlist
\o Enter the text you are looking for and click \gui Search.
\image qtcreator-searchresults.png
A list of files containing the searched text is displayed in the
\gui{Search Results} pane.
\list
\o To see all occurrences in a file, double-click the file name in
the list.
\o To go to an occurrence, double-click it.
\endlist
\endlist
\note You can use \gui{Advanced Find} also to search for symbols. For more
information, see \l{Finding Symbols}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-finding.html
\page creator-editor-refactoring.html
\nextpage qt-quick-toolbars.html
\title Refactoring
Code refactoring is the process of changing the code without modifying the
existing functionality of your application. By refactoring your code you
can:
\list
\o Improve internal quality of your application
\o Improve performance and extensibility
\o Improve code readability and maintainability
\o Simplify code structure
\endlist
\section1 Finding Symbols
To find the use of a specific symbol in your Qt C++ or Qt Quick project:
\list 1
\o In the editor, place the cursor on the symbol, and select:
\list
\o \gui {Tools > C++ > Find Usages}
\o \gui {Tools > QML > Find Usages}
\o \key Ctrl+Shift+U
\endlist
Qt Creator looks for the symbol in the following locations:
\list
\o Files listed as a part of the project
\o Files directly used by the project files (for example, generated
files)
\o Header files of used frameworks and libraries
\endlist
\note You can also select \gui{Edit > Find/Replace > Advanced Find >
C++ Symbols} to search for classes, methods, enums, and declarations
either from files listed as part of the project or from all files that
are used by the code, such as include files.
\image qtcreator-search-cpp-symbols.png
\o The \gui{Search Results} pane opens and shows the location and
number of instances of the symbol in the current project.
\image qtcreator-refactoring-find.png
\endlist
You can browse the search results in the following ways:
\list
\o To go directly to an instance, double-click the instance in the
\gui{Search Results} pane.
\o To move between instances, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-forward.png
and
\inlineimage qtcreator-back.png
in the \gui{Search Results} pane.
\o To expand and collapse the list of all instances, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-expand.png
.
\o To clear the search results, click \inlineimage qtcreator-clear.png
.
\endlist
\section1 Renaming Symbols
The functions available for renaming symbols depend on whether you are
writing C++ or QML code. For QML, you can only rename IDs.
To rename a specific symbol in a Qt project:
\list 1
\o In the editor, place the cursor on the symbol you would like to
change and select \gui Tools > \gui C++ >
\gui{Rename Symbol Under Cursor} or press \key Ctrl+Shift+R.
The \gui{Search Results} pane opens and shows the location and
number of instances of the symbol in the current project.
\image qtcreator-refactoring-replace.png
\o To replace all selected instances, enter the name of the new symbol
in the \gui{Replace with} text box and click \gui Replace.
To omit an instance, uncheck the check-box next to the instance.
\note This action replaces all selected instances of the symbol in
all files listed in the \gui{Search Results} pane. You cannot
undo this action.
\endlist
\note Renaming local symbols does not open the \gui{Search Results} pane.
The instances of the symbol are highlighted in code and you can edit the
symbol. All instances of the local symbol are changed as you type.
To rename an ID in a Qt Quick project:
\list 1
\o Right-click an ID in the QML code and select
\gui {Rename id}.
\o In the \gui {Rename id} field, enter the new ID.
\endlist
\section1 Applying Refactoring Actions
Qt Creator allows you to quickly and conveniently apply actions to refactor
your code by selecting them in a context menu. The actions available depend on
the position of the cursor in the code editor and on whether you are writing
C++ or QML code.
To apply refactoring actions to C++ code, right-click an operand, conditional
statement, string, or name to open a context menu. In QML code, click an element
ID or name.
In the context menu, select \gui {Refactoring} and then select a refactoring action.
You can also press \gui {Alt+Enter} to open a context menu that contains refactoring
actions available in the current cursor position.
\section2 Refactoring C++ Code
You can apply the following types of refactoring actions to C++ code:
\list
\o Change binary operands
\o Simplify if and while conditions (for example, move declarations out of
if conditions)
\o Modify strings (for example, set the encoding for a string to Latin-1, mark
strings translatable, and convert symbol names to camel case)
\o Create variable declarations
\o Create method declarations and definitions
\endlist
The following table summarizes the refactoring actions for C++ code. The
action is available when the cursor is in the position described in the
Activation column.
\table
\header
\i Refactoring Action
\i Description
\i Activation
\row
\i Add Curly Braces
\i Adds curly braces to an if statement that does not contain a
compound statement. For example, rewrites
\code
if (a)
b;
\endcode
as
\code
if (a) {
b;
}
\endcode
\i if
\row
\i Move Declaration out of Condition
\i Moves a declaration out of an if or while condition to simplify the
condition. For example, rewrites
\code
if (Type name = foo()) {...}
\endcode
as
\code
Type name = foo;
if (name) {...}
\endcode
\i Name of the introduced variable
\row
\i Rewrite Condition Using ||
\i Rewrites the expression according to De Morgan's laws. For example,
rewrites:
\code
!a && !b
\endcode
as
\code
!(a || b)
\endcode
\i &&
\row
\i Rewrite Using \e operator
\i Rewrites an expression negating it and using the inverse operator. For
example, rewrites:
\list
\o \code
a op b
\endcode
as
\code
!(a invop b)
\endcode
\o \code
(a op b)
\endcode
as
\code
!(a invop b)
\endcode
\o \code
!(a op b)
\endcode
as
\code
(a invob b)
\endcode
\endlist
\i <= < > >= == !=
\row
\i Split Declaration
\i Splits a simple declaration into several declarations. For example,
rewrites:
\code
int *a, b;
\endcode
as
\code
int *a;
int b;
\endcode
\i Type name or variable name
\row
\i Split if Statement
\i Splits an if statement into several statements. For example, rewrites:
\code
if (something && something_else) {
}
\endcode
as
\code
if (something) {
if (something_else) {
}
}
\endcode
and
\code
if (something || something_else)
x;
\endcode
with
\code
if (something)
x;
else if (something_else)
x;
\endcode
\i && ||
\row
\i Swap Operands
\i Rewrites an expression in the inverse order using the inverse operator.
For example, rewrites:
\code
a op b
\endcode
as
\code
b flipop a
\endcode
\i <= < > >= == != && ||
\row
\i Convert to Decimal
\i Converts an integer literal to decimal representation
\i Numeric literal
\row
\i Convert to Hexadecimal
\i Converts an integer literal to hexadecimal representation
\i Numeric literal
\row
\i Convert to Octal
\i Converts an integer literal to octal representation
\i Numeric literal
\row
\i Convert to Objective-C String Literal
\i Converts a string literal to an Objective-C string literal
if the file type is Objective-C(++). For example, rewrites the following strings
\code
"abcd"
QLatin1String("abcd")
QLatin1Literal("abcd")
\endcode
as
\code
@"abcd"
\endcode
\i String literal
\row
\i Enclose in QLatin1Char(...)
\i Sets the encoding for a character to Latin-1, unless the character is
already enclosed in QLatin1Char, QT_TRANSLATE_NOOP, tr, trUtf8,
QLatin1Literal, or QLatin1String. For example, rewrites
\code
'a'
\endcode
as
\code
QLatin1Char('a')
\endcode
\i String literal
\row
\i Enclose in QLatin1String(...)
\i Sets the encoding for a string to Latin-1, unless the string is
already enclosed in QLatin1Char, QT_TRANSLATE_NOOP, tr, trUtf8,
QLatin1Literal, or QLatin1String. For example, rewrites
\code
"abcd"
\endcode
as
\code
QLatin1String("abcd")
\endcode
\i String literal
\row
\i Mark as Translatable
\i Marks a string translatable. For example, rewrites \c "abcd" with
one of the following options, depending on which of them is available:
\code
tr("abcd")
QCoreApplication::translate("CONTEXT", "abcd")
QT_TRANSLATE_NOOP("GLOBAL", "abcd")
\endcode
\i String literal
\row
\i #include Header File
\i Adds the matching #include statement for a forward-declared class or struct
\i Forward-declared class or struct
\row
\i Add Definition in 'filename'
\i Inserts a definition stub for a member function declaration in the
implementation file
\i Method name
\row
\i Add 'Function' Declaration
\i Inserts the member function declaration that matches the member function
definition into the class declaration. The function can be public,
protected, private, public slot, protected slot, or private slot.
\i Method name
\row
\i Add Local Declaration
\i
Adds the type of an assignee, if the type of the right-hand side of the assignment
is known. For example, rewrites
\code
a = foo();
\endcode
as
\code
Type a = foo();
\endcode
where Type is the return type of \c {foo()}
\i Assignee
\row
\i Convert to Camel Case...
\i Converts a symbol name to camel case, where elements of the name are joined
without delimiter characters and the initial character of each element is
capitalized. For example, rewrites \c an_example_symbol
as \c anExampleSymbol and \c AN_EXAMPLE_SYMBOL as \c AnExampleSymbol
\i Indentifier
\row
\i Complete Switch Statement
\i Adds all possible cases to a switch statement of the type \c enum
\i Switch
\row
\i Generate Missing Q_PROPERTY Members...
\i Adds missing members to a Q_PROPERTY:
\list
\o \c read method
\o \c write method, if there is a WRITE
\o \c {on...Changed} signal, if there is a NOTIFY
\o data member with the name \c {m_}
\endlist
\i Q_PROPERTY
\endtable
\section2 Refactoring QML Code
You can apply the following types of refactoring actions to QML code:
\list
\o Rename IDs
\o Split initializers
\o Move a QML element into a separate file to reuse it in other
.qml files
\endlist
The following table summarizes the refactoring actions for QML code. The
action is available when the cursor is in the position described in the
Activation column.
\table
\header
\i Refactoring Action
\i Description
\i Activation
\row
\i Move Component into 'filename.qml'
\i Moves a QML element into a separate file
\i Element name
\row
\i Rename id
\i Renames all instances of an element ID in the currently open file
\i Element ID
\row
\i Split Initializer
\i Reformats a one-line element into a multi-line element. For example,
rewrites
\code
Item { x: 10; y: 20; width: 10 }
\endcode
as
\code
Item {
x: 10;
y: 20;
width: 10
}
\endcode
\i Element property
\endtable
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-qml-application.html
\page creator-project-managing.html
\nextpage creator-project-creating.html
\title Managing Projects
To set up a project, you first have to decide what kind of an
application you want to develop: whether you want a user interface
based on Qt Quick, Qt widgets, or HTML5. For a Qt Quick or HTML5 project,
you must also
choose the language to implement the application logic: C++ or JavaScript.
You can also create other kinds of projects, such as Qt console
applications, shared or static C++ libraries, or subprojects.
You can use wizards to create and import projects. The wizards prompt you
to enter the settings needed for that particular type of project and create
the necessary files for you. You can add your own custom wizards to
standardize the way subprojects and classes are added to a project.
The wizards set up projects to use the Qt build tool, qmake. It is a
cross-platform system for build automation that helps simplify the build
process for development projects across different platforms. qmake
automates the generation of build configurations so that only a few lines
of information are needed to create each configuration. For more
information about qmake, see the
\l{http://qt.nokia.com/doc/4.7/qmake-manual.html}{qmake Manual}.
You can modify the build and run settings for qmake projects in the
\gui Projects mode.
Alternatively, you can use the CMake build automation system and set up the
projects manually. In addition, you can import generic projects that do not
use qmake or CMake. This allows you to use Qt Creator as a code editor. For
generic projects, Qt Creator ignores your build system.
To develop applications for Symbian devices, you use
qmake and the local Symbian compiler (on Windows) or qmake and a compilation
service at Forum Nokia (on Linux and Mac OS) to build the applications for
the Symbian devices target. The interface to the compilation service, Remote
Compiler, is installed as a part of the \QSDK. For more information, see
\l{Building with Remote Compiler}.
When you install the \QSDK, the build and run settings for the Maemo and
Symbian targets are set up automatically. However, you need to install and
configure some additional software on the devices to be able to connect to
them from the development PC.
You can use sessions to store personal data, such as bookmarks and
breakpoints that are usually not of interest to other developers working on
the same projects. Sessions allow you to quickly switch between projects
when you work on several projects.
The following sections describe how to manage projects:
\list
\o \l{Creating a Project}
\o \l{Opening a Project}
\o \l{Adding Libraries to Projects}
\o \l{Connecting Maemo Devices}
\o \l{Connecting Symbian Devices}
\o \l{Managing Sessions}
\endlist
For advanced options, see the following topics:
\list
\o \l{Adding New Custom Wizards}
\o \l{Setting Up a CMake Project}
\o \l{Setting Up a Generic Project}
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-project-managing.html
\page creator-project-creating.html
\nextpage creator-project-opening.html
\title Creating a Project
\image qtcreator-new-project.png
You can use wizards to create following types of projects:
\list
\o Qt Quick Project
Use QML to define the user interface and,
optionally, C++ or JavaScript to define the application logic
\o Qt Widget Project
Use \QD forms to define a Qt widget based
user interface and C++ to define the application logic
\o Other Project
\list
\o HTML5 based applications
\o Qt console applications
\o Shared or static C++ libraries
\o Qt unit tests
\o Qt Custom Designer Widgets
\o Subprojects
\endlist
\o Project from Version Control
Import a project from a supported version control system. For more
information on how version control systems are integrated in
Qt Creator, see \l{Using Version Control Systems}.
\endlist
To create a new project, select \gui File > \gui{New File or Project} and
select the type of your
project.
The contents of the wizard dialogs depend on the project type and
the build targets that you select in the \gui {Target Setup} dialog.
Follow the instructions of the wizard.
For examples of creating different types of projects, see
\l{Getting Started}.
For more information about creating Qt Quick projects, see
\l {Creating Qt Quick Projects}.
To change the location of the project directory, and to specify settings
for building and running projects, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
\gui{Projects} > \gui{General}.
To specify build and run settings for different target platforms, select
\gui Projects.
\section1 Adding Files to Projects
You can use wizards also to add individual files to your projects.
You can create the following types of files:
\list
\o Qt resource files, which allow you to store binary files in the
application executable
\o \QD forms and \QD form classes, which specify parts of user
interfaces in Qt widget based projects
\o QML files, which specify elements in Qt Quick projects
\o GLSL files that define fragment and vertex shaders in both Qt Quick
projects and Qt widget based projects
\o C++ class, source, or header files that you can use to write the
application logic in both Qt Quick projects and Qt widget based
projects
\o JavaScript files that you can use to write the application logic in
Qt Quick projects
\o Text files
\endlist
\section2 Creating C++ Classes
The \gui {C++ Class Wizard} allows you to create a C++ header and source file for
a new class that you can add to a C++ project. Specify the class name, base
class, and header and source files for the class.
The wizard supports namespaces. To use a namespace, enter a qualified
class name in the \gui {Class name} field. For example:
MyNamespace::MySubNamespace::MyClass.
\image qtcreator-cpp-class-wizard.png "Enter Class Name dialog"
The names of the header and source file are based on the class name. To change the
default suffix of a file, click \gui Configure.
You can create your own project and class wizards. For more information,
see \l{Adding New Custom Wizards}.
\section2 Creating OpenGL Fragment and Vertex Shaders
Qt provides support for integration with OpenGL implementations on all
platforms, which allows you to display hardware accelerated 3D graphics
alongside a more conventional user interface. For more information, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtopengl.html}{QtOpenGL Module}.
You can use the QGLShader class to compile OpenGL shaders written in the
OpenGL Shading Language (GLSL) and in the OpenGL/ES Shading Language
(GLSL/ES). QGLShader and QGLShaderProgram shelter you from the details of
compiling and linking vertex and fragment shaders.
You can use Qt Creator code editor to write fragment and vertex shaders
in GLSL or GLSL/ES. The code editor provides syntax highlighting and code
completion for the files.
\image qtcreator-new-opengl-file.png "New OpenGL file wizard"
\section2 Displaying Additional File Types in Projects Pane
Qt Creator determines whether to display files from the project folder
in the \gui Projects pane depending on the file type (.pro, .pri, .cpp,
.h, .ui, .qrc, and so on). To display other types of files, edit the
project file. Add filenames as values of the \c {OTHER_FILES} variable.
You can also use wildcards.
For example, the following code specifies that text files are displayed
in the \gui Projects pane:
\code
OTHER_FILES += *.txt
\endcode
This also makes the files available in the \gui Locator.
\section1 Adding Subprojects to Projects
When you create a new project, you can add it to another project as a subproject
in the \gui{Project Management} dialog. However, the root project must
specify that qmake uses the \c subdirs template to build the project.
To create a root project, select \gui {File > New File or Project... >
Other Project > Subdirs Project > Choose}.
On the \gui Summary page, select \gui {Finish & Add Subproject} to create
the root project and to add another project, such as a C++ library.
The wizard creates a project file (.pro) that defines a \c subdirs template
and the subproject that you add as a value of the
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qmake-variable-reference.html#subdirs}{SUBDIRS variable}.
It also adds all the necessary files for the subproject.
To add more subprojects, right-click the project name in the \gui Projects
pane, and select \gui {New Subproject} in the context menu.
To remove subprojects, right-click the project name in the \gui Projects
pane, and select \gui {Remove Subproject} in the context menu.
To specify dependencies, use the \gui{Add Library} wizard. For more information,
see \l{Adding Libraries to Projects}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-project-creating.html
\page creator-project-opening.html
\nextpage creator-project-qmake-libraries.html
\title Opening a Project
Qt Creator stores information that it needs to build projects in a .user file.
If Qt Creator cannot find the file when you open an existing project, it prompts you
to enter the information. If you created the project by using another Qt Creator
instance, Qt Creator asks whether you want to use the old settings. The settings
are specific to the development environment, and should not be copied from one
environment to another. Therefore, we recommend that you click \gui No and enter
the information again in the \gui {Project Setup} dialog.
The \gui {Project Setup} dialog displays a list of development environments for
target platforms (such as desktop, Maemo5 devices, and Symbian devices) that are
installed on the development PC. Select the Qt versions that you want to use to build
the project for each target.
\image qtcreator-open-project-targets.png "Target Setup dialog"
If Qt Creator cannot find an existing build for a particular development
environment (Qt version) and target, it starts out from a clean slate, and
creates a new build in the specified directory. Qt Creator suggests a name
and location for the directory that you can change.
By default, Qt Creator does a \l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow build} and also
creates the directory. However, shadow building is not supported for the Symbian
Devices or Maemo5 target on Windows.
If you have built the project before, Qt Creator can use the existing build
configuration to make the exact same build as found in the directory available to
Qt Creator.
If you know you have a build, but it is not listed, click \gui {Add Build}
to locate it. Select a directory, and Qt Creator scans it (including
subdirectories) for additional builds of the project. Qt Creator adds the found
builds to the target list.
You can edit the build configuration later. For more information, see
\l{Editing Build Configurations}.
To open a project:
\list 1
\o Select \gui File > \gui{Open File or Project} and select the project
to open.
\o In the \gui {Project Setup} dialog, select the Qt versions to use as
build targets for your project, and click \gui{Finish}.
\note If you have only one development environment installed, this dialog
is skipped.
\endlist
Qt Creator parses all the source files in the project and performs a semantic
analysis to build up the information that it needs for functions such as
navigation and finding usages. Qt Creator also scans for all include files in
your include path recursively, so that it can complete them.
Progress bars are displayed during parsing and scanning.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-os-supported-platforms.html
\page creator-project-wizards.html
\nextpage creator-project-cmake.html
\title Adding New Custom Wizards
If you have a team working on a large application or several applications,
you might want to standardize the way the team members create projects
and classes.
You can copy the wizard templates in the template folders
to create your own project and class wizards. They are displayed in the
\gui New dialog that opens when you choose \gui {File > New File or Project}.
In a project wizard, you can specify the files needed in a project.
You can add wizard pages to allow developers to specify settings for the
project.
In a class wizard, you can allow developers to specify the class name, base
class, and header and source files for the class.
To see how this works, rename wizard_sample.xml as wizard.xml in the
\c {\share\qtcreator\templates\wizards\listmodel\helloworld} and
\c {\share\qtcreator\templates\wizards\listmodel\listmodels} folders. After
you restart Qt Creator, the \gui {Custom Classes}
and \gui {Custom Projects} categories appear in the \gui New dialog.
\image qtcreator-custom-project-wizards.png "The New dialog with custom projects and classes"
\section1 Overview of Custom Wizards
A custom wizard defines the user interface of a wizard page. The values the user enters
in the wizard are assigned field names. Field name and value pairs are then passed to
the file creation process. File creation can happen in the following ways:
\list 1
\o Template-based, where source files that contain placeholders for
the field names are provided. During processing, the placeholders are replaced
by the values from the wizard page. Optionally, modifier
characters are applied. For more information, see \l{Processing Template Files}.
\o Generator script, where a script is called to create the files.
\note This option mainly exists to accommodate existing generator scripts or
cases where complicated algorithmic logic is required when generating files. Writing
cross-platform scripts is inherently difficult, and therefore, it is not recommended
for new wizards. For more information, see \l{Using Generator Scripts}.
\endlist
Custom wizards are located in subdirectories of the following directories:
\list
\o \c{share/qtcreator/templates/wizards}
\o the local user's configuration folder,
\c{$HOME/.config/Nokia/qtcreator/templates/wizards}
\o \c{%APPDATA%\Nokia\qtcreator\templates\wizards}
\endlist
They contain an XML configuration file called wizard.xml, the
template source files, and optionally, the generator script.
\section1 Creating Project Wizards
To create a project wizard:
\list 1
\o Make a copy of the \c {share/qtcreator/templates/wizards/helloworld} or
\c {share/qtcreator/templates/wizards/listmodel} folder.
\o Modify the wizard_example.xml file.
\o The following code determines the type of the wizard and its place
in the \gui New dialog:
\code
\endcode
\list
\o \c version is the version of the file contents. Do not modify this value.
\o \c kind specifies the type of the wizard: \c project or \c class.
\o \c class specifies the type of the project. Currently the only available
type is \c qt4project, which specifies a Qt console project.
\o \c firstpage specifies the place of the new page in the standard project
wizard. The value 10 ensures that the custom page appears after the standard
pages, as the last page of the wizard.
\o \c id is the unique identifier for your wizard. The letter specifies the
position of the wizard within the \c category. The HelloWorld wizard appears
as the first wizard in the second category in the \gui New dialog.
\o \c category is the category in which to place the wizard in the list.
The letter specifies the position of the category in the list in the \gui New
dialog.
\endlist
\o The following code specifies the icon and text that appear in the \gui New
dialog:
\code
console.png
Creates a hello-world-project with custom message.
Erzeugt ein Hello-Welt-Projekt mit einer Nachricht.
Hello World;
Hallo Welt;
Custom Projects
Benutzerdefinierte Projekte
\endcode
\list
\o \c icon appears next to the \c displayName.
\o \c description appears at the bottom of the \gui New dialog when you
select the display name.
\o \c displayName appears in the \gui New dialog, under the
\c displayCategory.
You can add translations as values for the text elements. Specify the target
language as an attribute for the element. Use locale names (QLocale).
For example, \c {xml:lang="de"}.
\endlist
\o Files to be added to the project:
\list
\o Template-based: The following code specifies the files to add to the project:
\code
\endcode
\list
\o \c source specifies the file to copy to the project. The files must be
located in the wizard folder.
\o \c openeditor indicates that the file is to be opened in an editor after
the wizard has finished.
\o \c binary indicates that the file is a binary file (for example, an
image file). It is to be copied to the target folder as is. Placeholders
are not replaced with values.
\o \c target specifies the new filename for the file. The \c {%ProjectName%}
variable is replaced with the string that users specify in the \gui Name
field on the first page of the wizard.
\o \c openproject indicates that the file is a project file which is to be opened
after the wizard has finished.
\endlist
See also \l{Processing Template Files}.
\o Generator-script: The following code specifies that the script \c generate.pl is to be used
to create the files:
\code
\endcode
In each argument, the field placeholders are replaced by the field
values. There are additional boolean attributes which give fine-grained control:
\list
\o \c omit-empty specifies that complete argument is to be omitted when all
placeholders expand to empty values. In the above example,
the option \c --source-suffix will not be passed to the script if the value is empty.
\o \c write-file indicates that instead of the expanded value,
the value will be written to a temporary file and its file name will be
passed to the script instead. This is useful for multi-line text fields.
\endlist
See also \l{Using Generator Scripts}.
\endlist
\o The following code creates a page that specifies settings for the project:
\code
Hello World Parameters
Hallo Welt Parameter
Hello world message:
Hallo-Welt-Nachricht:
\endcode
\list
\o \c fieldpagetitle specifies the title of the page.
\o \c field specifies whether the field is mandatory (\c true or \c false).
You can use the value of the \c name field as a variable in other files (for
example, \c {%MESSAGE%}.
\o \c fieldcontrol specifies the field. \c class specifies the field type.
You can use interface objects from the QWidget class to create fields. This
example uses QLineEdit to create an input field.
\o \c validator specifies a regular expression to check the characters allowed in
the field.
\o \c defaulttext specifies text that appears in the field by default.
\o \c fielddescription specifies the field name that appears on the wizard page.
\endlist
\endlist
\section1 Creating Class Wizards
The widget.xml file for a class wizard is very similar to that for a project
wizard. The differences are discussed below.
To create a class wizard:
\list 1
\o The following code specifies settings for the wizard:
\code
Creates a QAbstractListModel implementation.
Erzeugt eine Implementierung von QAbstractListModel.
QAbstractListModel implementation
Implementierung von QAbstractListModel
Custom Classes
Benutzerdefinierte Klassen
\endcode
For more information about the elements and their values, see
\l {Creating Project Wizards}.
\o The following code specifies the files to add to the project:
\code
\endcode
Here, \c target contains the following variables that are used to construct
the filename:
\list
\o \c {%ClassName:l%} is replaced with the value of the \c ClassName field.
The modifier \c l converts the string to lower case, to observe Qt
conventions.
\o \c {%CppSourceSuffix%} and \c {%CppHeaderSuffix%} are pre-defined.
For more information, see \l{Pre-defined Standard Variables}.
\endlist
\code
ListModel parameters
Parameter des ListModel
Class name:
Klassenname:
Data type:
Datentyp:
\endcode
In addition to QLineEdit, QComboBox is used in the class wizard to create
a field. \c combochoices specifies the options in the combobox and
\c defaultindex specifies that QString is the default value.
\endlist
\section1 Processing Template Files
When processing a template source file, placeholders specifying the field names
in the format \c{%FIELDNAME%} are replaced by the values entered by the user.
In addition, modifier characters are supported. For example, \c{%FIELDNAME:u%}
specifies that the value is converted to upper case. This enables generating header
guards for C++ header files.
The following modifier characters are supported:
\list
\o \c{l} for lower case.
\o \c{u} for upper case.
\o \c{c} for upper case initial letter ("project" > "Project").
\endlist
You can use conditions to add sections of the file depending on field values.
Use a syntax that is similar to C++ preprocessing, as demonstrated in
the profile of the \c{helloworld} example:
\code
@if "%SCRIPT%" == "true"
QT += script
@endif
\endcode
The value of the Boolean (QCheckBox) field labeled \c{SCRIPT} determines
whether the script module is added. The expressions must expand to valid
Javascript expressions after field replacement.
\section1 Pre-defined Standard Variables
In addition to the field values entered by the user, you can use
the following pre-defined standard values:
\list
\o \c {%ProjectName%} is replaced by the name of the project in the case
of project wizards.
\o \c {%Path%} is replaced by the path to the target directory.
For classes, this is the directory, where the files
are created. For project wizards, an additional subdirectory
named after the project is created.
\o \c {%TargetPath%} is replaced by the path to the directory where the actual files
are created. For non-project wizards, it is identical to \c %Path%.
For project wizards, it is \c %Path%/%ProjectName%.
\o \c {%CppSourceSuffix%} is replaced by the default source suffix, which
is defined in Qt Creator in \gui {Tools > Options... > C++ > File Naming}.
For example, if users enter \bold MyClass, the filename becomes myclass.cpp
when the project is created.
\o \c {%CppHeaderSuffix%} is replaced by the default header suffix, which
is also defined in \gui {File Naming}.
\endlist
\section1 Validating User Input
You can specify validation rules for user input. The rules consist of a Boolean
JavaScript expression and an error message. The placeholders in them are
replaced with values before they are evaluated or displayed.
Consider the following rule used in the \l{Creating Class Wizards} example:
\code
%ClassName% cannot be used as class name.
%ClassName% kann nicht als Klassenname verwendet werden.
\endcode
It ensures that the class name entered by the user does not match the name of
the base class. If the validation fails, a red label displaying the message appears
at the bottom of the wizard page.
\section1 Using Generator Scripts
The values entered in the wizard page are passed to the script
as command line arguments as defined by the wizard configuration file.
In addition, the script must implement a \c{--dry-run} command line option.
Qt Creator needs to know the file names before the files are created to check
whether files with identical names already exist, for example. Therefore,
script file generation is a two-step process:
\list 1
\o Determine file names and attributes: The script is called with the command line
\c{--dry-run} option and the field values. It then prints the relative path
names of the files it intends to create, followed by comma-separated attributes
matching those of the \c{} element, for example:
\code
myclass.cpp,openeditor
myclass.h,openeditor
myproject.pro,openproject
\endcode
\o Create files: The script is called with the parameters only in the working directory.
It then actually creates the files. If directories are needed, the script
should create them, too.
\endlist
The \c{scriptgeneratedproject} sample wizard illustrates the usage.
A typical script invocation for this example (obtained by running Qt Creator with
\c{--customwizard-verbose}) looks as follows:
\code
generate.pl --class-name=TestClass --project-name=TestProject --header-suffix=h --source-suffix=cpp --description=/tmp/qtcreatorj26629.txt
\endcode
By default, the scripts are run in the directory corresponding to
\c %TargetPath%. This can be overriden by specifying the
attribute \c workingdirectory on the element \c generatorscript.
For example, if the script creates the project directory by itself,
%Path% can be specified. In that case, \c --dry-run should output
the correct relative paths or absolute paths constructed using the value of
\c %Path%.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-build-settings.html
\page creator-project-qmake.html
\nextpage creator-tool-chains.html
\title Adding Qt Versions
Qt Creator allows you to have multiple versions of Qt installed on
your development PC and use different versions to build your projects for
different targets. For example, \QSDK contains special Qt versions for
Maemo and Symbian development.
Qt Creator checks the directories listed in the \c{PATH} environment
variable for the qmake executable. If a qmake executable is found, it is
referred to as \bold{Qt in PATH} and selected as the Qt version to use
in the \gui Projects mode in the \gui {Build Settings}. If Qt Creator
cannot find qmake, the value in the \gui {Qt version} field might be
invalid and you might need to change it.
Qt Creator automatically detects the Qt versions that are registered by
your system or by \QSDK. To view the settings for each Qt version, move the
mouse pointer over it in the list. To add Qt versions, select
\gui {Tools > Options... > Qt4 > Qt Versions}.
Typically, you select the Qt versions for a project when you use project
wizards to create the project. You can add Qt versions for a project in
\gui {Build Settings}.
\section2 Setting Up New Qt Versions
To add a Qt version:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 > \gui Add.
\image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-add.png
\o In the \gui{qmake location} field, enter the path to the
directory where the qmake executable is located.
\o In the \gui{Version name} field, edit the name that Qt Creator
suggests for the Qt version.
Qt Creator automatically determines the path to the binaries in
the Qt installation and displays it in the dialog.
\o In the \gui Helpers section, you can build the debugging
helpers that are available for the Qt version. This is
necessary, because the internal data structures of Qt can
change between versions. For more information, see
\l{Using Debugging Helpers}.
\endlist
\section2 Setting Up Qt for Symbian Versions
If you install Qt for Symbian as a part of \QSDK, it is automatically
detected by Qt Creator. If you install other Symbian SDKs and register them
with devices.exe, Qt Creator automatically detects the Qt version.
If the selected Qt version was built using the SBSv2 build system, that
is available for Symbian OS 9.5 based SDKs, Qt Creator builds your projects
using this build system. The \gui {SBS v2 directory} field is enabled and
you must specify the path to the directory where the SBS executable (for
example, sbs.bat on Windows) is located.
To add a Qt for Symbian version:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 > \gui{Qt Versions}.
\o Select the Qt for Symbian version you want the Qt Creator to use.
\image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-symbian.png
For more information about how to add tool chains for using the
GCCE and WINSCW compilers, see \l{Adding Tool Chains}.
\o In the \gui {S60 SDK} field, enter the path to the directory where
the Symbian SDK is located.
\o In the \gui {SBS v2 directory} field, enter the path to the
directory where the SBS v2 executable is located.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-project-qmake.html
\page creator-tool-chains.html
\nextpage creator-run-settings.html
\title Adding Tool Chains
A \e {tool chain} specifies a compiler and a debugger and other necessary
tools for building an application that is targeted for a particular desktop
or mobile platform. Qt Creator automatically detects the tool chains that
are registered by your system or by \QSDK.
You can add tool chains to build applications by using other compilers or
with different versions of the automatically detected compilers:
\list
\o GNU Compiler Collection (GCC) is a cross compiler for Linux and
Mac OS X.
\o MinGW (Minimalist GNU for Windows) is a native software port of GCC
and GNU Binutils for use in the development of native Microsoft
Windows applications on Windows or as cross compiler. MinGW is
distributed together with Qt Creator and Qt SDK for Windows.
\o GCCE (GNU Compiler Collection for Embedded) is an ARM-based
compiler used in Symbian OS 9 and distributed together with the
Symbian OS 9 SDKs.
\o RVCT is an ARM-bases compiler for building applications for Symbian
devices (requires a license).
\o WINSCW is a compiler for building applications that can be run or
debugged on the Symbian Emulator. It is distributed together with
Symbian SDKs.
\endlist
To build an application using MinGW or GCCE, specify the paths to the
directories where the compiler and debugger are located and select the
application binary interface (ABI) version from the list of available
versions.
Qt Creator allows you to select a tool chain that matches the Qt version
in the \gui Projects mode \gui {Build Settins}.
To add tool chains:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Tools > Options... Tool Chains > Add} and select a
compiler in the list.
To clone the selected tool chain, select \gui {Clone}.
\o In the \gui Name column, double-click the name to change it.
\o In the \gui{Compiler path} field, enter the path to the directory
where the compiler is located. For WINSCW, enter the path to the
Carbide C++ installation directory here.
\image qtcreator-toolchains.png
The other settings to specify depend on the tool chain.
\o For RVCT, select the ARM version to use in the \gui {ARM version}
field.
\endlist
\section2 Troubleshooting MinGW Compilation Errors
If error messages displayed in the \gui {Compile Output} pane contain
paths where slashes are missing (for example, C:QtSDK),
check your PATH variable. At the command line, enter the following commands:
\code
where sh.exe
where make.exe
where mingw32-make.exe
\endcode
If these commands show paths, they have been added to the global PATH variable
during the installation of a tool chain based on Cygwin or MinGW, even though
this is against Windows conventions.
To keep working with the third-party tool chain, create a new shell link
that adds the required paths (as Visual Studio and Qt do). The shell link
must point to cmd.exe, as illustrated by the following example:
\c {C:\Windows\System32\cmd.exe /K C:\path_to\myenv.bat}
where the /K parameter carries out the command specified in the bat file.
Create the myenv.bat file at \e path_to, which should be in a convenient location.
In the file, specify the paths to the tool chains. For example,
\c {set PATH=C:\path1;C:\path2;%PATH%}
where \e path1 and \e path2 are paths to the tool chains.
Finally, remove the paths from the global PATH, reboot the computer, and
run the \c where commands again to verify that the global PATH is now clean.
You can use the shell link to run the tools in the third-party tool chains.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-project-opening.html
\page creator-project-qmake-libraries.html
\nextpage creator-developing-maemo.html
\title Adding Libraries to Projects
In addition to Qt libraries, you can add other libraries to your projects.
The way the library is added depends on whether it is a system library or
your own library or a 3rd party library located in the build tree of the
current project or in another build tree.
\image qtcreator-add-library-wizard.png "Add Library wizard"
Because system libraries do not typically change and are often found by
default, you do not need to specify the path to the library or to its includes
when you add it.
For your own libraries and 3rd party libraries, you need to specify
the paths. Qt Creator tries to quess the include path for an external library,
but you need to check it and modify it if necessary. Qt Creator automatically
adds the include path for an internal library.
For all libraries, select the target platforms for the application, library,
or plugin.
Specify whether the library is statically or dynamically linked. For a
statically linked internal library, Qt Creator adds dependencies
(PRE_TARGETDEPS) in the project file.
Depending on the development platform, some options might be detected
automatically. For example, on Mac OS, the library type (\gui Library or
\gui Framework) is detected automatically and the option is hidden. However,
if you develop on another platform than Mac OS and want to build your
project for the Mac OS, you must specify the library type.
The default convention on Windows is that the debug and release versions
of a library have the same name,
but are placed in different subdirectories, usually called \e debug and
\e release. If the library path does not contain either of these folders,
you cannot select the option to place the libraries in separate
folders.
Alternatively, the letter \e d can be added to the library name for the debug
version. For example, if the release version is called example.lib, the
debug version is called exampled.lib. You can specify that the letter
is added for the debug version and removed for the release version.
If the library name ends in \e d, deselect the \gui {Remove "d" suffix
for release version} option.
Qt Creator supports code completion and syntax highlighting for the added
libraries once your project successfully builds and links to them.
\section1 To Add Libraries
\list 1
\o In the \gui Projects pane, open the project file (.pro).
\o Right-click in the code editor to open the context menu and select
\gui {Add Library...}.
\o Follow the instructions of the wizard.
\endlist
For more information about the project file settings, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qmake-project-files.html#declaring-other-libraries}{Declaring Other Libraries}.
\section1 Example of Adding Internal Libraries
The following example describes how to add a statically linked internal
library to your project.
\list 1
\o Choose \gui {File > New File or Project... > Other Projects >
C++ Library} to create the library.
The \gui {Introduction and Product Location} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-add-library-wizard-ex-1.png "Introduction and Product Location dialog"
\o In the \gui Type field, select \gui {Statically Linked Library}.
\o In the \gui Name field, give a name for the library. For example,
\bold mylib.
\o Follow the instructions of the wizard until you get to the
\gui {Project Management} dialog. In the \gui {Add to project}
list, select a project. For example, \bold myapp.
\o In the \gui Projects pane, open the project file (.pro).
For example, \bold myapp.pro.
\o Right-click in the code editor to open the context menu and select
\gui {Add Library... > Internal Library > Next}.
\o In the \gui Library field, select \bold mylib and click \gui Next.
\o Click \gui Finish to add the following library declaration to the
project file:
\code
win32:CONFIG(release, debug|release): LIBS += -L$$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/release/ -lmylib
else:win32:CONFIG(debug, debug|release): LIBS += -L$$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/debug/ -lmylib
else:symbian: LIBS += -lmylib
else:unix: LIBS += -L$$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/ -lmylib
INCLUDEPATH += $$PWD/../../../projects/mylib
DEPENDPATH += $$PWD/../../../projects/mylib
win32:CONFIG(release, debug|release): PRE_TARGETDEPS += $$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/release/mylib.lib
else:win32:CONFIG(debug, debug|release): PRE_TARGETDEPS += $$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/debug/mylib.lib
else:unix:!symbian: PRE_TARGETDEPS += $$OUT_PWD/../../../projects/mylib/libmylib.a
\endcode
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-usability.html
\page creator-building-running.html
\nextpage creator-building-targets.html
\title Building and Running Applications
Qt Creator provides support for building, running, and deploying Qt
applications for desktop environment and mobile devices.
You can set up the following configurations:
\list
\o \e {Build configuration}, which contains everything you need to
compile the sources into binaries.
\o \e {Deploy configuration}, which handles the packaging and copying
of the necessary files to a location you want to run the executable at.
The files can be copied to a location in the file system of the development
PC or a mobile device.
\o \e {Run configuration}, which starts the application in the location
where it was stored by the deploy configuration.
\endlist
By default, when you select the \gui Run function, Qt Creator builds, deploys,
and runs the project. For more information about how to change the default
behavior, see \l{Customizing the Build Process}.
\section1 Setting Up a Project
When you install the \QSDK, the build and run settings for the tool chains
delivered with the \QSDK are set up automatically.
To view and modify the settings for currently open projects, switch to the
\gui Projects mode by pressing \key Ctrl+5.
\image qtcreator-projectpane.png
You can add a target if the development environment for the target
platform is installed on the
development PC and the Qt version is configured. Click
\inlineimage qtcreator-qt4-addbutton.png "Add Target button"
and select from a list of available
targets. To remove a target, select it and click
\inlineimage qtcreator-target-remove.png "Remove Target button"
.
You can select the targets and use the \gui Build menu commands to
build, deploy, and run projects.
The project pane consists of the following tabs:
\list
\o \l{Running Applications on Multiple Targets}{Targets}
(If you have installed the development environment for only one target, the \gui Targets
tab is replaced by a \gui Build tab and a \gui Run tab.)
\o \l{Specifying Build Settings}{Build Settings}
\o \l{Specifying Run Settings}{Run Settings}
\o \l{Specifying Editor Settings}{Editor Settings}
\o \l{Specifying Dependencies}{Dependencies}
\endlist
Use the \gui Build and \gui Run buttons to switch between
the build and run settings for the active project.
If you have multiple projects open in Qt Creator, use the tabs at the
top of the window to navigate between their settings.
\section1 Customizing the Build Process
To specify the relationship between the release, build, and deploy configurations, select
\gui {Tools > Options... > Project}. By default, the \gui {Always build project
before deploying it} and the \gui {Always deploy project before running it}
options are enabled. Therefore, when you select the \gui Run function,
Qt Creator builds, deploys, and runs the project.
\image qtcreator-project-options-deploy.png "Project General Options"
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-building-running.html
\page creator-building-targets.html
\nextpage creator-running-targets.html
\title Building Applications for Multiple Targets
You can build applications for multiple targets. By default, when
you run the application on a target, you also build and deploy it to the
target, first. However, you can also perform each operation separately.
To check that the application code can be compiled and linked for a target,
you can build the project. The build errors and warnings are displayed in
the \gui {Build Issues} output pane. More detailed information is displayed in
the \gui {Compile Output} pane.
To build an application:
\list 1
\o Select a target for the project.
\image qtcreator-target-selector.png "Target selector"
\o Choose \gui {Build > Build Project} or press \key {Ctrl+B}.
\endlist
For more information on the options you have, see \l{Specifying Build Settings}.
\section1 Building for Symbian
The tool chain for building applications locally on the development PC for
the \gui {Symbian Device} target is only supported on Windows.
If you develop on Linux or Mac OS, you must use the Remote Compiler
interface to a compilation service at Forum Nokia. For more information,
see \l{Building with Remote Compiler}.
\section2 Troubleshooting Build Issues
If you cannot build the application for a Symbian device, check that:
\list
\o You selected the Symbian Device target to build the application.
\o You selected the correct Qt version to build the application.
\endlist
\section1 Building for Symbian Emulator
Qt Creator does not create release configurations for the
\gui {Symbian Emulator} target, because Symbian Emulator supports only debug
builds.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-building-targets.html
\page creator-running-targets.html
\nextpage creator-build-settings.html
\title Running Applications on Multiple Targets
By default, running an application also builds it and deploys it to a
location from where it can be run on the desktop, in Qt Simulator, or
on a mobile device that is connected to the development PC.
To run executable files without deploying them first, deselect the \gui {Tools >
Options... > Project > Always deploy project before running it} option.
This allows you to test SIS files that you receive from Ovi Publishing or
Symbian Signed after you have them signed, for example.
For more information on the options you have, see \l{Specifying Run Settings}.
\section1 Running on Desktop
\list 1
\o Select \gui Desktop as the target.
\image qtcreator-target-selector.png "Target selector"
\o Click the \gui Run button.
\endlist
\section1 Running on Qt Simulator
You can use the Qt Simulator to test Qt applications that are intended
for mobile devices in an environment similar to that of the device. You
can change the information that the device has about its configuration
and environment.
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Qt Simulator} as the target.
\o Click the \gui Run button.
\endlist
For more information about using the Qt Simulator, see the
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qtsimulator/index.html}{Qt Simulator Manual}.
\section1 Running on Maemo
\list 1
\o Build and run the application for \l{Running on Qt Simulator}{Qt Simulator}.
\o Build and run the application for \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}{Maemo Emulator}.
\o Alternatively, you can build and run the application for a device:
\list 1
\o Set up the MADDE development environment and specify a connection
to the device. For more information, see
\l{Connecting Maemo Devices}.
\o Connect the device to the development PC.
\o Click the \gui Run button.
\endlist
\endlist
Qt Creator uses the compiler specified in the MADDE tool chain to
build the application.
Qt Creator generates an installation package, installs it on the device,
and executes the selected application.
The application views are displayed on the Nokia N900.
Command-line
output is visible in the Qt Creator \gui {Application Output} view.
Choose \gui {Projects > Maemo Run} to view the settings for deploying the
application on the connected device and creating the installation package.
For more information, see \l{Specifying Run Settings for Maemo Devices}.
Debugging also works transparently.
\section1 Running on Symbian
\list 1
\o Build and run the application for \l{Running on Qt Simulator}{Qt Simulator}.
\o If no problems are found, build and run the application for a device.
\o To test functionality that uses Symbian APIs, you can build and
run the application for Symbian Emulator.
\endlist
\section2 Running on a Device
\list 1
\o Install the required software on the device. For more information, see
\l{Connecting Symbian Devices}.
\o Connect the device to the development PC through a USB cable.
The target selector displays a green check mark when a
device is connected.
\image qtcreator-qt4-symbian-device-connected.png
The tool tip of the target selector shows more details about the actual
device that will be used when you run your application.
\o Start the debugging agent (CODA or App TRK) application on your device.
\note If you use CODA over an USB connection, it starts up
automatically when you connect the device to the development PC.
\o Click the \gui Run button.
\endlist
You can connect several devices to your development PC simultaneously.
In the details of the run configuration for the \gui{Symbian Device} target,
select the device to run your application on.
When your application is ready for delivery to users, specify run settings
for creating the final SIS installation packages. For more information,
see \l{Creating SIS Files}.
If you cannot run the application on a device, check that:
\list
\o The Nokia USB drivers that come with \e{PC Suite} or \e{Ovi Suite}
have been installed on the development PC.
\o The device is connected through USB cable in \e{PC Suite} mode.
\o The debugging agent (App TRK or CODA) is running on the device with
the status \e connected.
\note If you use the CODA debugging agent over WLAN, you must enter
the WLAN address and port number in Qt Creator, separated by a
colon (:). For example: 192.167.0.100:1534
\o The device is detected and selected in the \gui {Run Settings}.
\endlist
If this does not help to solve your problem, search the qt-creator@trolltech.com
mailing list archives or provide feedback to us via the methods described on the
\l{http://developer.qt.nokia.com/wiki/Category:Tools::QtCreator}{Qt Creator Development Wiki}.
\section2 Running on Symbian Emulator
Select
the \gui{Symbian Emulator} target as the active one, and build and run your
project.
If you cannot run the application in the emulator, check that:
\list
\o You selected the \gui{Symbian Emulator} target for your application.
\o If you cannot select \gui {Symbian Emulator} as target, check that
Carbide.c++ is installed correctly and that the path to the Carbide.c++
installation directory is specified for the WINSCW tool chain in the
\gui{Compiler path} field
in \gui {Tools > Options... > Tool Chains}.
\o If the emulator process cannot be started, try closing Qt Creator and
starting the application directly from your file manager. Having
done this, Qt Creator should be able to run your projects in the
emulator.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-publish-ovi.html
\page creator-remote-compiler.html
\nextpage creator-help.html
\title Building with Remote Compiler
The \gui {Remote Compiler} target is an interface to a compilation service at
Forum Nokia. It provides a simple, standardized environment for building Qt
applications and creating installation packages for Symbian and Maemo devices
when you do not have the necessary tool chains and SDKs installed or they are
not supported on the development PC. You can choose from a set of supported
devices, such as S60 3rd Edition or S60 5th Edition devices.
You need a Forum Nokia user account to use the Remote Compiler. You can
create an account for free at \l{http://www.forum.nokia.com/}{Forum Nokia}.
\note Remote Compiler is an experimental component that is installed as
part of \QSDK.
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Start > \QSDK > Maintain \QSDK} to open the
\gui {Maintain \QSDK} tool.
\o In the \gui {Package Manager}, select \gui {Experimental >
Remote Compiler} to install Remote Compiler.
\o In Qt Creator, choose \gui {Tools > Options > Projects > Remote Compiler}
to log on to Forum Nokia.
\image remotecompiler-fn-logon.png "Remote Compiler options"
\o Choose \gui {Projects}.
\o Click
\inlineimage qtcreator-qt4-addbutton.png "Add Target button"
and select \gui {Remote Compiler} to add Remote Compiler as a target.
\o Click \gui Add to add mobile device platforms as build configurations.
\o Click the \gui {Target Selector} and select a build configuration.
\o Choose \gui {Build > Build All}.
\endlist
The installation package is generated in the \gui {Build directory} on
the development PC.
For more information about Remote Compiler, choose \gui {Help > Contents >
Remote Compiler Manual}. The document is added during the installation of
Remote Compiler.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-running-targets.html
\page creator-build-settings.html
\nextpage creator-project-qmake.html
\title Specifying Build Settings
Different build configurations allow you to quickly switch between
different build settings. By default, Qt Creator creates \bold debug
and \bold release build configurations. A debug build contains additional
debug symbols that you need for debugging the application but that you
can leave out from the release version. Generally, you use the debug
configuration for testing and the release configuration for creating
the final installation file.
You specify build settings in the \gui Projects mode.
\image qtcreator-projectpane.png
To add a new build configuration, click \gui Add and select the type of
configuration you would like to add. You can add as many build
configurations as you need.
To delete the build configuration currently selected, click \gui Remove.
\section1 Editing Build Configurations
To edit a build configuration:
\list 1
\o Select the build configuration you want to edit in
\gui{Edit Build Configuration}.
\o In the \gui {Qt version} field, select the Qt version to use for
building project. You can add Qt versions to the list if they are
installed on the development PC, but were not detected
automatically. For more information, see \l{Adding Qt Versions}.
\o In the \gui {Tool chain} field, select the tool chain required
to build the project. The tool chains that are compatible with the
selected Qt version are listed. You can add tool chains to the list
if they are not automatically detected. For more information, see
\l{Adding Tool Chains}.
\o In the \gui {Build directory} field, specify the build directory for
the project.
By default, projects are built in a separate directory from the
source directory, as \l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow builds}.
This keeps the files generated for each target platform separate.
\note Shadow building is not supported by the Symbian build system.
Also, shadow building on Windows is not supported for Maemo.
If you only build for one target platform, you can deselect
the \gui{Shadow build} checkbox.
\endlist
\note The build configuration for the \gui{Symbian Device} target
uses the GCCE tool chain by default. If you want to build
for the device using RVCT, install the RVCT tool chain, and then
select it in the \gui {Tool chain} field.
\section1 Starting External Processes
Qt Creator executes external processes to accomplish tasks such as building
and running applications. To execute the processes, Qt Creator uses shell
commands that are native to the system. It constructs the commands from
an executable name and optional command line arguments.
The executable name is specified in the executable fields: \gui qmake,
\gui Make, \gui Command, or \gui Executable. It is either derived from the
project or specified manually. When you specify executables manually, you
can reference environment variables and Qt Creator variables. However, no
quoting rules
apply.
You can specify command-line arguments in the arguments fields: \gui {Additional
arguments}, \gui {Command arguments}, \gui {Make arguments}, or \gui Arguments.
You can create shell command lines that can contain redirection and other
advanced constructs. However, some more complex use cases, such as piping
test data into the application being tested or grouping commands, are not
supported because the value of the \gui Executable field is always placed
first when constructing the command.
\section2 Using Environment Variables
You can use any environment variables as values in the fields. For a list
of variable names, click \gui {Build Environment > Details} in the
\gui {Build Settings}. Environment variables are referenced using the native
syntax: $VARNAME or ${VARNAME} on Unix and %VARNAME% on Windows.
\section2 Using Qt Creator Variables
You can use Qt Creator variables in arguments, executable paths, and working
directories.
The variables take care of quoting their expansions, so you do not need to
put them in quotes.
The following Qt Creator variables are available:
\list
\o %{buildDir}
\o %{sourceDir}
\endlist
\section1 Build Steps
The build system of Qt Creator is built on qmake and make. In
\gui{Build Steps} you can change the settings for qmake and make. Qt
Creator runs the make command using the Qt version defined for the current
build configuration.
\image qtcreator-build-steps.png "Build steps"
To override the shell command that Qt Creator constructs by default, remove
the build step and add a custom build step that specifies another shell
command.
\section2 Adding Custom Build Steps
To add custom steps to the build settings, select \gui {Add Build Step >
Custom Process Step}.
By default, custom steps are disabled. To activate a custom step, select
the \gui{Enable custom process step} check-box.
\image qtcreator-build-steps-custom.png "Custom Process Step"
\section1 Clean Steps
You can use the cleaning process to remove intermediate files. This process
might help you to fix obscure issues during the process of building a
project.
\image qtcreator-clean-steps.png "Clean steps"
You can define the cleaning steps for your builds in the \gui{Clean Steps}:
\list
\o To add a clean step using make or a custom process, click
\gui{Add Clean Step} and select the type of step you want to add.
By default, custom steps are disabled. To activate a custom step,
select the \gui{Enable custom process step} check-box.
\o To remove a clean step, click \gui{Remove Item}.
\o To change the order of steps, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-movestep.png
.
\endlist
\section1 Build Environment
You can specify the environment you want to use for building in the
\bold{Build Environment} section. By default, the environment in which Qt
Creator was started is used and modified to include the Qt version.
Depending on the selected Qt version, Qt Creator automatically sets the
necessary environment variables. You can edit existing environment
variables or add, reset and unset new variables based on your project
requirements.
\image qtcreator-build-environment.png "Build Environment"
\note The changes are stored in the local project specific \c{.pro.user}
file. Therefore, they are not suitable for sharing between developers or
development PCs. To share settings, incorporate them into the build system.
For example, if you use qmake, make the changes in the \c{.pro} file.
\section2 Clearing the System Environment
To build with a clean system environment, select the \gui {Clear system
environment} check box. Qt Creator discards the current environment, and
populates a clean system environment with the environment variables that the
compilers and tools need. Therefore, the environment is never totally empty,
even after you clear it.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-tool-chains.html
\page creator-run-settings.html
\nextpage creator-editor-settings.html
\title Specifying Run Settings
Qt Creator automatically creates run configurations for your project.
To view and modify the settings, select \gui {Projects > Run}.
The settings to specify depend on the type of the project: Qt project
or Qt Quick project, and on the target for the project.
Click \gui Add to add run settings for a project and \gui Remove to remove
the current settings.
\section1 Specifying Run Settings for qmake Projects
The run configurations for qmake projects derive their executable from the parsed .pro
files.
For more information on how the commands are constructed, see
\l{Starting External Processes}.
\section2 Specifying Run Settings for Desktop Targets
You can specify command line arguments to be passed to the executable
and the working directory to use. The working directory defaults to
the directory of the build result.
For console applications, check the \gui{Run in Terminal} check box.
If you need to run with special environment variables set up, you
also do it in the run configuration settings.
\image qtcreator-pprunsettings.png
You can also create custom executable run configurations where you
can set the executable to be run. For more information, see
\l{Specifying a Custom Executable to Run}.
\section2 Specifying Run Settings for Symbian Devices
Qt Creator automatically detects Symbian devices that are connected to
the development PC with a USB cable.
If only one device is detected, the application is deployed to it
and run on it. If multiple devices are connected to the PC,
make sure that the correct device is selected in the
\gui {Symbian Device} run settings for your project.
You can also pass command line arguments to your application on the device.
Press the \gui{Device info button} to get more information about the selected
device, such as the CPU type and the running debugging agent version.
\image qtcreator-symbian-run-settings.png "Run settings for Symbian devices"
To use the CODA debugging agent over a WLAN connection, enter the WLAN
address of the device and the port number to use, separated by a colon (:),
in the \gui WLAN field. For example: 192.167.0.100:1534
When you deploy the application for the \gui{Symbian Device} target, Qt
Creator generates a Symbian installation system (SIS) file in the project folder
and copies it to the device that is connected to the development PC.
If no device is connected, you must remove the \gui {Deploy SIS Package} step,
to create the package. Click \gui {Remove Item} to skip the step.
\image qtcreator-remove-deploy-step.png "Removing deploy steps"
When you are ready to publish the application on Ovi Store or some other
channel, you must make sure that the SIS file meets the requirements for
publishing and installing applications on Symbian devices. For more information,
see \l{Deploying Applications to Symbian Devices}.
\section2 Specifying Run Settings for Maemo Devices
To run an application on a Maemo device, create and select
a device configuration in the Maemo run settings for your project.
You can also pass command line arguments to your application.
\image qtcreator-screenshot-run-settings-maemo.png "Run settings for Maemo devices"
To run and debug applications on Maemo devices, you must create connections
from the development PC to the devices. Click \gui {Manage device
configurations} to create connections. For more information, see
\l {Configuring Connections in Qt Creator}.
By default, Qt Creator runs the remote gdbserver daemon on the device for
debugging. However, if the sysroot does not match that of the device, you
can run remote GDB, instead. Select the \gui {Use remote GDB} option in
\gui {Debugging details}. Select the \gui {Set debugger} link to specify
settings for GDB.
When you run the application on the \gui{Maemo} target, Qt Creator generates
a Debian installation package in the build directory by default. You can deliver
the installation package to users for installation on Maemo devices that are of
the same type and run the same firmware as the connected device. For more
information, see \l{Deploying Applications to Maemo Devices}.
\section1 Specifying a Custom Executable to Run
If you use CMake or the generic project type in Qt Creator, or want
to run a custom desktop executable, create a \gui {Custom Executable}
run configuration for your project. For example, when working on a library,
you can run a test application that links against the library.
Specify the executable to run, command line arguments, working directory,
and environment variables to use.
\image qmldesigner-run-custom-exe.png "Run settings for custom executables"
\section1 Specifying Run Settings for Qt Quick UI Projects
You can specify run settings for the \gui Desktop target:
\list
\o In the \gui {Qt version} field, select a Qt version that has support
for QML.
\o In the \gui Arguments field, you can specify command line arguments
to be passed to the executable.
\o In the \gui {Main QML file}, select the file that \QQV will be
started with.
\o In the \gui Debugger group, select the languages to debug:
\gui{C++} and \gui QML. \gui {Debug port} is the port to access \QQV.
You can use any free port in the registered port range.
For more information, see \l{Debugging Qt Quick Projects}.
\endlist
\note Opening a socket at a well-known port presents a security risk. Anyone
on the Internet could connect to the application that you are debugging and
execute any JavaScript functions. Therefore, you must make sure that the port
is properly protected by a firewall.
\image qmldesigner-run-settings.png "Run settings for Qt Quick UI projects"
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-deployment-symbian.html
\page creator-deployment-maemo.html
\nextpage creator-publishing-to-maemo-extras.html
\title Deploying Applications to Maemo Devices
You can specify settings for deploying applications to Maemo devices in the
project .pro file. You can view the settings in the \gui {Run Settings}.
\image qtcreator-maemo-deployment.png "Deploy to device"
The files to be installed are listed in the
\gui {Deploy to Device} step, the \gui {Files to install for subproject}
field. The
\gui {Local File Path} field displays the location of the file on the development
PC. The \gui {Remote Directory} field displays the folder where the file is installed on
the device.
Text in red color indicates that the information is missing. Select the
text to edit it and add the missing information.
You can use desktop files to display icons on the home screen of the
device. To add desktop files to the project file, select \gui {Add Desktop
File}. To specify the icon file to display, select \gui {Add Launcher
Icon...}. To remove desktop files and icons, delete the definitions from
the project file.
If you develop your own libraries, Qt Creator needs to be able to find
them when you compile projects depending on them. When you install MADDE,
an instance of the device file
system, called sysroot, is installed to the development PC. Libraries are copied to
sysroot if the \gui {Also deploy to sysroot} check box is selected.
\section1 Creating Debian Installation Packages
When you run the application on the \gui{Maemo} target, Qt Creator generates
a Debian installation package in the build directory by default. You can deliver
the installation package to users for installation on Maemo devices that are of
the same type and run the same firmware as the connected device.
\image qtcreator-maemo-deb-package.png "Create installation package"
The name of the installation package is displayed in the \gui {Package name}
field in the \gui {Create Package} step. You can change the version number
in the \gui {Package version} field.
You can specify information that users see on a delivery channel, such as
Ovi Store or Maemo.org. You can specify a short description of the
application, package
name, and application icon.
The Debian control file contains an application icon in encoded form. To add the
application icon to the file, select it in the \gui {Icon to be displayed
in Package Manager} field.
For more information about icon files and adding them manually, see
\l{ http://wiki.maemo.org/Packaging#Displaying_an_icon_in_the_Application_Manager_next_to_your_package}{Displaying an icon in the Application Manager next to your package}.
\note Qt Creator automates this process for you.
Qt Creator provides templates for a set of files that must be included
in Debian packages. When you create a Maemo target for a project, Qt Creator
asks whether packaging files are to be added to the project and to version
control. If you plan to edit the packaging files, add them to version
control.
To edit the files, select a file in \gui {Adapt Debian
file} and click \gui Edit. The file opens in the text editor.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-deployment-maemo.html
\page creator-publishing-to-maemo-extras.html
\nextpage creator-publish-ovi.html
\title Publishing Maemo Applications to Extras-devel
Extras is the primary repository for Maemo applications where most
community software can be found. You can browse the applications available
in Extras at \l{http://maemo.org/downloads/Maemo5/}{Maemo Downloads}.
You can publish both free and commercial applications to Extras. Free
applications must be open source and pass through a QA process.
Commercial applications are usually closed, binary only, and the publisher
is responsible for assuring their quality and security.
You can upload free applications as Debian packages to
\l{http://wiki.maemo.org/Extras-devel}{Extras-devel} at Maemo.org to share
new updates to your application and to start the community QA process.
You need a \l{https://garage.maemo.org/}{Garage} account for the uploads,
but the package itself does not need to be hosted in the Garage.
You can use the \gui {Publish for Fremantle Extras-devel Free Repository}
wizard to create a source archive and, optionally, upload it to a build
server for compiling and packaging. The package is then moved to the
Extras-devel repository. From there on, you must follow the standard
Maemo processes to get the application published to Extras.
The wizard checks that the package contains all the information that is
required to publish applications on Extras: package description and
Package Manager icon. For more information about entering this information,
see \l{Creating Debian Installation Packages}.
To use the publishing wizard:
\list 1
\o Select the \gui {Maemo5} build target for your project.
\o Choose \gui {Build > Publish Project}.
\o Select \gui {Publish for Fremantle Extras-devel Free Repository},
and then select \gui {Start Wizard}.
\o Select the Qt version and device type to build against and click
\gui Next.
To create a source archive without uploading it to the build
server, select the \gui {Only create source package, do not upload}
check box.
\o In the \gui {Garage account name} field, enter your login name, or
select \gui {Get an account} to create a new account.
\image qtcreator-publish-maemo-extras.png "Upload Settings dialog"
You can also select \gui {Request upload rights} to use the Maemo
Extras Assistant to validate your Garage account.
\o Select \gui Commit to publish the application.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-troubleshooting-debugging.html
\page creator-deployment.html
\nextpage creator-deployment-symbian.html
\title Deploying Applications to Mobile Devices
Deploy configurations in the \gui Project mode \gui {Run Settings} handle
the packaging of the application as an executable and copying it to a
location you want to run the executable at. The files can be copied to a location
in the file system of the development PC or a mobile device.
When you are ready to publish the application on Ovi Store or some other
channel, you must make sure that the installation file meets the requirements for
publishing and installing applications to Symbian or Maemo devices. The following
sections describe the steps that you have to take to create installation packages
for Symbian and Maemo devices and for publishing on Ovi Store:
\list
\o \l{Deploying Applications to Symbian Devices}
\o \l{Deploying Applications to Maemo Devices}
\o \l{Publishing Maemo Applications to Extras-devel}
\o \l{Publishing Applications to Ovi Store}
\o \l{Building with Remote Compiler}
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-deployment.html
\page creator-deployment-symbian.html
\nextpage creator-deployment-maemo.html
\title Deploying Applications to Symbian Devices
This section describes how to create installation packages that meet the
requirements for installing applications to Symbian devices.
\section1 Creating SIS Files
When you deploy the application for the \gui{Symbian Device} target, Qt
Creator automatically generates a Symbian installation system (SIS) file
in the project folder. You can deliver the installation file to users for
installation on Symbian devices.
The name of the installation file is displayed in the \gui {Installation file}
field in the \gui {Run Settings}. In the \gui {Installation drive} field, select the drive on the device
to install the application to. To suppress notifications on the device during the
installation, select the \gui {Silent installation} check box. If the silent
installation fails, Qt Creator attempts installation again, this time displaying
notifications and error messages.
To create a SIS package without copying it to the device (for example, to submit it
to \e {Application Signing Services for Ovi Store} or \e {Symbian Signed}),
create a deploy configuration that contains only the
\gui {Create SIS Package} step.
\image qtcreator-run-settings-create.png "Create SIS Package step"
\section1 Signing SIS Files
Only installation files signed with a certificate and private key are
allowed to be installed onto Symbian devices. By default, Qt Creator
self-signs the installation file. This self-signing allows you to install
the application on a mobile device but places limits on what you can do
with the installation file, including:
\list
\o Self-signed applications cannot access the more sensitive
\l{Capabilities and Signing}{capabilities} of the mobile device.
\o Security warnings will be displayed when you install the self-signed
application on a mobile device.
\o Self-signed applications cannot be published to Ovi
Store.
\endlist
To get around these limitations, you need to go through the Symbian Signed
or Application Signing Services for Ovi Store. The Symbian Signed organisation
manages a public key
infrastructure to provide public authentication of the information in the
application signing certificates. Their security partner can validate your
certificate and give you a Publisher ID. Then, when you sign an
application, other people can be confident that the information in your
certificate is correct and that the application does actually come from you.
Application Signing Services for Ovi Store is a variant of the Symbian
Signed certification provided by Ovi
Publishing. It is limited to the Basic and System capability sets
(Express Signing). Participants can submit an unsigned SIS file to Ovi
Publishing for signing. For more information about how
to participate, see
\l {http://wiki.forum.nokia.com/index.php/Guide_to_Publishing_Qt_Applications_to_the_Ovi_Store}{Guide to Publishing Qt Applications to the Ovi Store}.
There are also options that do not require you to get a Publisher ID. For
more detail about how the Symbian Signed process works, see
\l{https://www.symbiansigned.com}{Symbian Signed}.
When you have your own certificate and private key, you can specify them in
the \gui{Create SIS Package} step in the \gui {Run Settings}.
\image qtcreator-qt4-symbian-signing.png
If your private key is protected by a passphrase, Qt Creator asks you for the
passphrase when the package is signed and offers to store it. However, storing
passphrases in Qt Creator presents a security risk. To make Qt Creator forget
all saved passphrases, click \gui {Reset Passphrases}.
\section2 Capabilities and Signing
Capabilities allow the Symbian platform to control access by applications to
the functionality provided by the platform APIs. Access to capabilities is
determined by the device configuration and how the application has been signed.
Symbian Signed offers the following signing options depending on the
capabilities that the application accesses:
\list
\o \bold{Express signed} for applications that access only user and system
capabilities.
\o \bold{Certified signed} for applications that access also restricted or
device manufacturer capabilities.
\note You need to request the rights to access device manufacturer
capabilities from the manufacturer.
\endlist
For more information about how to choose the appropriate signing option and
how you can check which capabilities you need, see
\l{https://www.symbiansigned.com}{Symbian Signed}
and
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/platform-notes-symbian.html#required-capabilities}{Required Capabilities for Qt Applications}.
For more information on how to define capabilities for a project, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qmake-platform-notes.html#capabilities}{Capabilities}.
\note In Qt 4.7.1 and later, if you select the \gui {Self-signed certificate}
option, the SIS generation process checks that the package can be self-signed.
If problems are found, it attempts to fix the package. If fixes cannot be made,
a message appears in the \gui {Compile Output} view.
The following modifications can be made:
\list
\o Package UID is changed to an UID from the unprotected range (if it was
from the protected range).
\o Vendor ID is set to zero on all binaries included in the package file.
\o All restricted and device manufacturer capabilities are removed from all
libraries included in the package file.
\endlist
The application UID or capabilities used in executables (.exe) cannot be changed,
because that would break the application. If the executables use protected UIDs
or restricted or device manufacturer capabilities, signing fails and an error
message appears in the \gui {Compile Output} view.
\section1 Creating Smart Installer for Symbian Packages
To deploy Qt applications on Symbian devices, you must install the software that Qt applications
require, typically Qt, QtWebkit, and Open C. Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian makes it easier
for users to install Qt applications to Symbian phones by checking whether the device contains
the necessary software and by installing the missing pieces.
For this to work, the Nokia Smart Installer must be packaged with the Qt application. The
application SIS file must first be Symbian Signed or signed by the Application
Signing Services for Ovi Store. The capabilities used in the applications
determine, which signing option must be selected. The wrapper package must be signed using
either the same option or a more extensive option than the application SIS.
\note If you use the Application Signing Services for Ovi Store, you can submit an unsigned
wrapper package to Ovi Publishing. For more information, see
\l{Publishing Applications to Ovi Store}.
You can either install the Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian as part of
the \QSDK, or download and install it from the
\l{http://wiki.forum.nokia.com/index.php/Nokia_Smart_Installer_for_Symbian}{Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian}
wiki.
To package Nokia Smart Installer with the application, select the \gui {Create Smart Installer
package} check box. This ensures that up-to-date and appropriate versions of Qt and its
dependencies are installed on devices. Further, it reduces the file size of the application you
publish, because you do not have to deliver the required libraries.
Nokia has reserved the following UIDs to be used with Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian:
\list
\o 0xA000D7CE for self-signed applications
\o 0x2002CCCF for Ovi Store or Symbian Signed packages
\endlist
\section2 Creating Self-signed Smart Installer Packages
To create a self-signed Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian wrapped .sis file,
you must use an UID from the unprotected UID range, provided by Symbian Signed
and the wrapper package UID value 0xA000D7CE. If you used the Qt Creator project
wizard to create the project, this wrapper package UID is used by default.
\list 1
\o Make sure that the source directory is clean. For example, if you use git,
enter the following command:
\c {git clean -dfx}
\o Click \gui Projects to edit the \gui {Build Settings} for the
\gui {Symbian Device} target.
\o Select the \gui Release configuration.
\o Open the \gui {Run Settings}.
\o In the \gui {Create SIS Package} step, select \gui {Self-signed certificate}.
\o In the \gui {Deploy SIS Package} step, click \gui {Remove Item} to
skip the step of copying the SIS file to a device. The SIS file is created
in the project folder.
\image qtcreator-remove-deploy-step.png "Removing deploy steps"
\o To package Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian with the application, select
the \gui {Create Smart Installer package} check box.
\o Edit the project .pro file to use the correct UIDs for the application and
the wrapper package, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
\code
symbian {
TARGET.UID3 = 0xE4DE5D27
DEPLOYMENT.installer_header=0xA000D7CE
vendorinfo = \
"%{\"CustomVendor-EN\"}" \
":\"CustomVendor\""
my_deployment.pkg_prerules = vendorinfo
DEPLOYMENT += my_deployment
}
\endcode
\o Choose \gui {Build > Run Project}.
\endlist
Qt Creator automatically generates a wrapper package in the project folder.
\section2 Creating Symbian Signed Smart Installer Packages
If the application uses functions that require advanced capabilities (AllFiles,
DRM, TCB, CommDD, DiskAdmin, NetworkControl, MultimediaDD), you must use the
standard Symbian Signed process to have the application Symbian Signed. Depending
on the capabilities used, you may use either the Express Signed or the Certified
Signed path, or the manufacturer-specific channel (for AllFiles, DRM, and TCB).
\list 1
\o Make sure that the source directory is clean. For example, if you use git,
enter the following command:
\c {git clean -dfx}
\o Click \gui Projects to edit the \gui {Build Settings} for the
\gui {Symbian Device} target.
\o Select the \gui Release configuration.
\o Open the \gui {Run Settings}.
\o In the \gui {Create SIS Package} step, specify the developer certificate
and key in the \gui {Custom certificate} and \gui {Key file} fields.
\o In the \gui {Deploy SIS Package} step, click \gui {Remove Item} to
skip the step of copying the SIS file to a device. The SIS file is created
in the project folder.
\o Edit the project .pro file to use the correct UIDs and vendor information
for the application, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
\code
symbian {
TARGET.UID3 = 0x2000D7D1
DEPLOYMENT.installer_header=0x2002CCCF
vendorinfo = \
"%{\"CustomVendor-EN\"}" \
":\"CustomVendor\""
my_deployment.pkg_prerules = vendorinfo
DEPLOYMENT += my_deployment
}
\endcode
\o Choose \gui {Build > Run Project}.
\o Submit the created .sis file to Symbian Signed for certification.
\note Ensure that your application complies with the Symbian Signed
Test Criteria before submitting the file for certification. Also, if the file is
intended for Ovi Store publishing, verify that the application complies with Ovi
Store publishing requirements.
\o After receiving the .sis file from Symbian Signed, copy it over the old
application.sis.
\note The instructions below assume that you have installed \QSDK.
\o To package Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian with the application, choose
\gui {Start > Qt SDK > Symbian > Qt for Symbian Command Prompt}
to open the Qt command line environment.
\o Change to the project directory. For example:
\c{cd C:\Sources\Application}
\o To create a Smart Installer wrapper package, enter the following
command:
\c {C:\Sources\Application> make ok_installer_sis QT_SIS_CERTIFICATE=publisherid.cer QT_SIS_KEY=publisherid.key}
\o Submit the created wrapped .sis file, application_installer.sis, to
Symbian Signed. Express Signed is a suitable signing option for the wrapper
package. The capabilities used in the application do not play a role here,
because the wrapper package is already signed.
\endlist
Qt Creator automatically generates a wrapper package in the project folder.
\note Ensure that your application complies with the requirements before submitting
the file to Ovi Store.
For more information about the qmake DEPLOYMENT variable, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qmake-variable-reference.html#deployment}{qmake Variable Reference}.
For more information about the Nokia Smart Installer, see the
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/smart-installer/index.html}{Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian Manual}.
Note: Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian is only available on Windows.
\section1 Application UID
A UID is a globally unique identifier that is used to
uniquely identify, for example, an object or file type. In Symbian development,
objects are identified by compound identifiers that are constructed from three
UIDs, namely UID1, UID2, and UID3. UID1 and UID2 specify the category of an
object, whereas UID3 identifies a particular object, such as an application.
When you create a \gui {Mobile Qt Application}, Qt Creator adds a UID3 suitable for
development and debugging automatically to the application .pro file. However, to
distribute your application and get it Symbian Signed, you must apply for a UID
from Symbian Signed, which manages the allocation of UIDs. You can request UIDs either one
at a time or as preallocated blocks on the \l{https://www.symbiansigned.com/app/page}{Symbian Signed}
web site.
If you use the Ovi Signed process, Ovi Publisher Support allocates the UID for you.
Replace the testing UID with the distribution UID in the .pro file before you
build the final installation package. For more information, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qmake-platform-notes.html#unique-identifiers}{Unique Identifiers}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-publishing-to-maemo-extras.html
\page creator-publish-ovi.html
\nextpage creator-remote-compiler.html
\title Publishing Applications to Ovi Store
Ovi Store is the global content market of Nokia, which reaches millions of
people worldwide. Consumers can access Ovi Store through either of these
platforms:
\list
\o Ovi Store applications on mobile devices
\o Web browsers on desktop computers, laptops, netbooks, and tablets
\endlist
Consumers have access to a wide selection of content and can download
content in a few easy clicks.
The process and requirements to publish Qt applications to Ovi Store are
described in the
\l {http://wiki.forum.nokia.com/index.php/Guide_to_Publishing_Qt_Applications_to_the_Ovi_Store}{Guide to Publishing Qt Applications to the Ovi Store} wiki.
This section describes how to
generate installation packages that
you can publish to Ovi Store.
\section1 Publishing Qt Content for Symbian Devices
You can use the \e {Application Signing Services for Ovi Store} to get your
application Express Signed for
free by Nokia. Make sure to use the \l{Application UID}{application UID} that you
receive from Ovi Publisher Support.
The \gui {Publish Qt Symbian Applications to Ovi Store} wizard allows you
to check that your application can be
published on Ovi Store. It checks that the application UID, vendor name,
and the capabilities used meet the Ovi Publishing criteria.
If you use Symbian Signed UIDs or the application uses functions that
require advanced
\l{Capabilities and Signing}{capabilities}, you must
use the standard Symbian Signed process to have the application Symbian Signed
(using the Certified Signed path or the manufacturer-specific channel).
For more information, see \l{Deploying Applications to Symbian Devices}.
To use the publishing wizard:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Projects to select the Qt version to build the
application. For more information, see \l{Supported Configurations}.
\o Select the \gui {Symbian Device} build target for your project.
\o Choose \gui {Build > Publish Project}.
\o Select \gui {Publish Qt Symbian Applications to Ovi Store}, and then
select \gui {Start Wizard}.
\o Select the Qt version and device type to build against and click
\gui Next. We recommend that you select a release configuration.
\o The wizard checks the information in the project file against the
Ovi Publishing criteria and indicates possible problems. You can fix
some of the problems in the wizard.
\image qtcreator-publishing-wizard-symbian.png "Project File Checks dialog"
\o Select \gui Commit to save changes and create the .sis file. The
.sis file is packaged with Nokia Smart Installer for Symbian.
\o Choose \gui {Open Containing Folder} to open the folder where the
.sis file was created.
\o Submit the created .sis file to Ovi Publishing as a Qt Content item.
\note You cannot use this .sis file for testing.
\endlist
\note After you change the application UID, you must use the developer
certificate-key pair that you receive from Ovi Publisher Support for testing
the application on devices. The following error message is displayed on the
device if you use UIDs from the trusted range (0x2xxxxxxx) in a self-signed
application: \gui {Unable to install a trusted application from a trusted
supplier.} For more
information, see \l{http://wiki.forum.nokia.com/index.php/UID}{UID}.
If you try to use more capabilites than the certificate permits, the
following error message is displayed on the device: \gui {Requested
application access not granted.} For example, if you try to install a
self-signed application that uses a system capability.
\section2 Supported Configurations
When you select the Qt version to build the application with, consider
which version provides the application with the widest support on different
Symbian platforms. The binary compatibility promise of Qt and Symbian means
that applications that are built against Qt 4.6.3 also run on Qt 4.7.3.
Similarly, applications that are supported on Symbian^1 are also supported
on Symbian^3. However, dependencies, such as QML or Qt Mobility API
versions might restrict the choice of Qt versions that you have.
In general, if you use only Qt widgets and APIs in the application, you
can use \gui {Qt 4.6.3 for Symbian^1} to build it.
The application is supported on both Symbian^1 and Symbian^3 devices.
If you use QML in the application, you can use \gui {Qt 4.7.3 for
Symbian^1} to build it. The application is supported on both Symbian^1 and
Symbian^3 devices.
If you use native Symbian APIs, you must check that they are available on
the target devices. For more information about the API differences between
Symbian^1 (S60 5th Edition) and Symbian^3, see the \bold {Symbian
Reference Documentation for Qt}, which is delivered together with \QSDK
and which you can view in the \gui Help mode.
The following table summarizes the supported configurations for each Qt
version available in Qt Creator build settings:
\table
\header
\i Qt Version
\i QML
\i Qt Mobility Version
\i Native Symbian C++ APIs
\i Open GL
\row
\i Qt 4.6.3 for S60 3rd Edition
\i No
\i 1.0.2
\i No
\i No
\row
\i Qt 4.6.3 for Symbian^1 (S60 5th Edition)
\i No
\i 1.0.2
\i No
\i No
\row
\i Qt 4.6.3 for Symbian^3
\i No
\i 1.0.2
\i Yes
\i No
\row
\i Qt 4.7.3 for Symbian^1
\i Yes
\i 1.1.3
\i No
\i No
\row
\i Qt 4.7.3 for Symbian^3
\i Yes
\i 1.1.3
\i Yes
\i Yes
\endtable
\section1 Publishing Qt Content for Maemo Devices
The applications that you publish on Ovi Store, must meet the testing criteria
listed in
\l{http://www.forum.nokia.com/info/sw.nokia.com/id/9cd1eb18-821b-4228-a0a3-36b049c5d608/Maemo_5_Application_OVI_Store_Entry_Requirements.pdf.html}
{Maemo 5 Applications: Ovi Store Entry Requirements}.
Make sure that your application passes the following most commonly
failed test cases:
\list
\o Package filename must include the application name and version
number using three digits. For example: myapplication_1_0_1.deb
\o Application files must be installed to the opt folder on the ext3
partition.
\o Debian packages must be given the category user/hidden.
\o Application cannot crash or hang during use.
\o The application must handle different memory situations correctly.
\endlist
You set the application name and installation folder in the
\gui {Run Settings} for the project. For more information, see
\l{Deploying Applications to Maemo Devices}. Qt Creator specifies the correct
category settings by default when it creates the Debian directory and
the necessary files.
You can test the application on Qt Simulator and Maemo Emulator to make
sure that it does not crash or hang and to check how it handles different
memory situations. Before you submit the application to Ovi Publishing, you
must also fully test it on a Maemo device.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-run-settings.html
\page creator-editor-settings.html
\nextpage creator-build-dependencies.html
\title Specifying Editor Settings
You can configure the code editor according to your needs. You can specify
editor behavior either globally for all projects or separately for each
project. To specify global editor behavior, select \gui {Tools > Options...
> Text Editor > Behavior}.
To configure the editor behavior for the current project, deselect the
\gui {Use global settings} check box in the \gui {Editor Settings} for the
project. For more information about the settings, see:
\list
\o \l{Indenting Code}
\o \l{File Encoding}
\o \l{Moving to Symbol Definition or Declaration}
\o \l{Configuring Fonts}
\endlist
\image qtcreator-editor-settings.png "Editor Settings view"
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-settings.html
\page creator-build-dependencies.html
\nextpage creator-debugging.html
\title Specifying Dependencies
If you have multiple projects loaded in a session, you can define the
order in which they are built. For example, if project A depends on project
B, project B must be built first.
\note The build order is stored as a property of a session, not a project.
You must open the session for these settings to take effect. For more
information, see \l{Managing Sessions}.
\image qtcreator-build-dependencies.png "Dependencies view"
To define the build order of projects within a session:
\list 1
\o In \gui Projects, select a project.
\o Click \gui Dependencies.
\o Select projects that must be built before the current project is
built.
\endlist
Qt Creator calculates the build order based on the dependencies that you
specify for the projects loaded in the session.
\note You cannot use this view to specify subprojects for projects.
For more information on how to add subprojects, see \l{Adding Subprojects
to Projects}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-quick-tour.html
\page creator-getting-started.html
\nextpage creator-build-example-application.html
\title Getting Started
This section contains examples that illustrate how to use Qt Creator
to create, build, and run simple
applications:
\list
\o \l{Building and Running an Example Application}
\o \l{Creating a Qt Widget Based Application}
\o \l{Creating a Mobile Application with Qt SDK}
\o \l{Creating a Qt Quick Application}
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-writing-program.html
\page creator-mobile-example.html
\nextpage creator-qml-application.html
\title Creating a Mobile Application with Qt SDK
\note To complete this tutorial, you must install \QSDK.
The installation program installs and configures the necessary tool chains
for mobile application development.
This tutorial describes how to use Qt Creator to create a small Qt
application, Battery Indicator, that uses the System Information
Mobility API to fetch battery information from the device.
\image qtcreator-batteryindicator-screenshot.png
\section1 Creating the Battery Indicator Project
\note Create the project with the \gui{Help} mode active so that you can follow
these instructions while you work.
\list 1
\o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt Widget Project > Mobile
Qt
Application > Choose}.
\image qtcreator-new-mobile-project.png "New File or Project dialog"
The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-mobile-intro-and-location.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
\o In the \gui{Name} field, type \bold {BatteryIndicator}.
\o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
\c {C:\Qt\examples}, and then click \gui{Next}.
The \gui{Target Setup} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-mobile-project-qt-versions.png "Target Setup dialog"
\o Select \gui {Maemo5}, \gui {Qt Simulator}, and \gui {Symbian
Device} targets,
and click \gui{Next}.
\note Targets are listed if you installed the appropriate development
environment, for example, as part of the \QSDK. You can add targets
later in the \gui Projects mode.
The \gui {Mobile Options} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-mobile-project-app-options.png "Mobile Options dialog"
\o In the \gui {Orientation behavior} field, determine how the application
behaves when the orientation of the device display rotates between portrait
and landscape, and then click \gui{Next}.
\note This dialog opens only if you select \gui Maemo5 or
\gui {Symbian Device} target in the \gui {Target Setup} dialog.
The \gui {Symbian Specific} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-mobile-project-symbian-options.png "Symbian Specific dialog"
\note Qt Creator contains a default program icon and generates an
\l{Application UID}, for testing the application on a device. You only
need to change the icon and UID if you deliver the application for public use.
\o Click \gui Next.
The \gui {Maemo Specific} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-mobile-project-maemo-options.png "Maemo Specific dialog"
\o In the \gui {Application icon (64x64)} field, select the application
icon to use on Maemo targets, or click \gui Next to use the default icon.
The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-mobile-project-summary.png "Project Management dialog"
\o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
\endlist
The BatteryIndicator project now contains the following files:
\list
\o BatteryIndicator.pro
\o main.cpp
\o BatteryIndicator.svg
\o BatteryIndicator.png
\o BatteryIndicator.desktop
\o deployment.pri
\o mainwindow.cpp
\o mainwindow.ui
\o mainwindow.h
\o templates for Debian deployment files
\endlist
\image qtcreator-mobile-project-contents.png "Project contents"
The files come with the necessary boiler plate code that you must
modify, as described in the following sections.
\section1 Declaring the Qt Mobility API
To use the Qt Mobility APIs or develop applications for Symbian
devices, you must modify the .pro file to declare the Qt Mobility APIs
that you use.
This example uses the System Info API, so you must declare it, as
illustrated by the following code snippet:
\code
CONFIG += mobility
MOBILITY = systeminfo
\endcode
Each Mobility API has its corresponding value that you have to add
as a value of MOBILITY to use the API. For a list of the APIs and the
corresponding values that you can assign to MOBILITY, see the
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qtmobility/quickstart.html}{Quickstart Example}.
\section1 Designing the User Interface
\list 1
\o In the \gui{Editor} mode, double-click the mainwindow.ui
file in the \gui{Projects} view to launch the integrated \QD.
\o Drag and drop a \gui{Progress Bar} (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qprogressbar.html}{QProgressBar})
widget to the form.
\image qtcreator-mobile-project-widgets.png "Adding widgets to the UI"
\o In the \gui Properties pane, change the \gui objectName to
\bold batteryLevelBar.
\o Right-click the \gui MainWindow object and select
\gui {Lay Out > Lay Out Horizontally} to ensure that the battery
indicator widget size is adjusted correctly on Maemo devices.
\endlist
\section1 Completing the Header File
The mainwindow.h file contains some of the necessary #includes, a
constructor, a destructor, and the \c{Ui} object. You must include
the System Info header file, add a shortcut to the mobility name
space, and add a private function to update the battery level value in
the indicator when the battery power level changes.
\list 1
\o In the \gui{Projects} view, double-click the \c{mainwindow.h} file
to open it for editing.
\o Include the System Device Info header file, as illustrated by the following
code snippet:
\snippet examples/batteryindicator/mainwindow.h 1
\o Add a shortcut to the mobility name space, as illustrated by the
following code snippet:
\snippet examples/batteryindicator/mainwindow.h 2
\o Declare a private function in the \c{private} section, after the
\c{Ui::MainWindow} function, as illustrated by the following code
snippet:
\snippet examples/batteryindicator/mainwindow.h 3
\endlist
\section1 Completing the Source File
Now that the header file is complete, move on to the source file,
mainwindow.cpp.
\list 1
\o In the \gui{Projects} view, double-click the mainwindow.cpp file
to open it for editing.
\o Create a QSystemDeviceInfo object and set its value. Then connect the signal
that indicates that battery level changed to the \c setValue
slot of the progress bar. This is illustrated by the following code snippet:
\snippet examples/batteryindicator/mainwindow.cpp 1
\o Use the constructor to set initial values and make sure that the
created object is in a defined state, as illustrated by the following
code snippet:
\snippet examples/batteryindicator/mainwindow.cpp 2
\endlist
\section1 Compiling and Running Your Program
Now that you have all the necessary code, select \gui {Qt Simulator}
as the target and click the
\inlineimage qtcreator-run.png
button to build your program and run it in the Qt Simulator.
In Qt Simulator, run the runOutOfBattery.qs example script
to see the value change in the Battery Indicator application.
Select \gui {Scripting > examples > runOutOfBattery.qs > Run}.
\image qtcreator-mobile-simulated.png "Mobile example in Qt Simulator"
\section1 Testing on a Symbian Device
You also need to test the application on real devices. Before you can
start testing on Symbian devices, you must connect them to the development
PC by using a USB cable and install the necessary software on them.
\list 1
\o Install Qt libraries, Qt mobile libraries, and a
debugging agent on the device. For more information,
see \l{Connecting Symbian Devices}.
\o Start the debugging agent, App TRK or CODA, on the device.
\o Click the \gui {Target Selector} and select \gui {Symbian Device}.
\o Click \gui Run to build the application for the Symbian device.
\endlist
\section1 Testing on the Maemo Emulator
The Maemo emulator emulates the Nokia N900 device environment. You can test
applications in conditions practically identical to running the application
on a Nokia N900 device with the software update release 1.3 (V20.2010.36-2).
For more information, see \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-getting-started.html
\page creator-build-example-application.html
\nextpage creator-writing-program.html
\title Building and Running an Example Application
You can test that your installation is successful by opening an existing
example application project.
\list 1
\o On the \gui Welcome page, select \gui {Choose an Example...}
in the \gui {Explore Qt Quick Examples} field, and then select
\gui {Toys > Clocks}.
\image qtcreator-gs-build-example-open.png "Selecting an example"
\o Select targets for the project. Select at least Qt Simulator
and one of the mobile targets, Maemo or Symbian Device, depending on
the device you develop for.
\image qtcreator-gs-build-example-targets.png "Selecting targets"
\note You can add targets later in the \gui Projects mode.
\o To test the application in Qt Simulator, click the \gui {Target
Selector} and select \gui {Qt Simulator}.
\image {qtcreator-gs-build-example-select-qs.png} "Selecting Qt Simulator as target"
\o Click
\inlineimage{qtcreator-run.png}
to build the application and run it in Qt Simulator.
\o To see the compilation progress, press \key{Alt+4} to open the
\gui {Compile Output} pane.
The \gui Build progress bar on the toolbar turns green when the project
is successfully built. The application opens in Qt Simulator.
\image {qt-simulator.png} "Qt Simulator"
\o Change the settings in the
\gui View pane. For example, rotate the device by clicking the
\gui {Orientation} buttons or choose from the various Symbian and Maemo
configurations in the \gui {Device} field. You can also simulate various
mobile functions and create your own scripts.
\o To test the application on a Symbian device, install Qt libraries
and a debugging agent on the device. For more information,
see \l{Connecting Symbian Devices}.
\o Click the \gui {Target Selector} and select \gui {Symbian Device}.
\o Click \gui Run to build the application and run it on the Symbian device.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-mobile-example.html
\page creator-qml-application.html
\nextpage creator-project-managing.html
\title Creating a Qt Quick Application
\note To complete this tutorial, you must have Qt 4.7 or later installed.
This tutorial uses basic elements and illustrates basic concepts of
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtquick.html}{Qt Quick}.
This tutorial describes how to use the Qt Creator to implement the
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/declarative-animation-states.html}
{states and transitions example application}. The example application displays a
Qt logo that moves between three rectangles on the page when you click them.
\image qmldesigner-tutorial.png "States and transitions example"
\section1 Creating the Project
\list 1
\o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt Quick UI >
Choose}.
\o Follow the instructions of the wizard to create a project called Transitions.
\o Press \key {Ctrl+R} to run the application in the QML Viewer.
\endlist
Qt Creator generates a default QML file that you can modify to create the main view
of the application.
\image qmldesigner-tutorial-project.png "Transitions project in Edit mode"
\section1 Creating the Main View
The main view of the application displays a Qt logo in the top left corner of the
screen and two empty rectangles.
To use the states.png image in your application, you must copy it to the project
directory (same subdirectory as the QML file) from the examples directory in the
Qt installation directory. For example:
\c {C:\QtSDK\Examples\4.7\declarative\animation\states}. The image appears
in the \gui Resources pane. You can also use any other image or a QML element, instead.
\list 1
\o In the \gui Projects view, double-click the main .qml file (Transitions.qml)
to open it in the code editor.
\o Click \gui Design to open the file in \QMLD.
\image qmldesigner-tutorial-desing-mode.png "Transitions project in Design Mode"
\o In the \gui Navigator pane, select \gui Text and press \key Delete to delete it.
\o Select \gui Rectangle to edit its properties.
\image qmldesigner-tutorial-page.png "Page properties"
\list a
\o In the \gui Id field, enter \e page, to be able to reference the rectangle
from other places.
\o In the \gui Colors tab, \gui Rectangle field, set the color to #343434.
\endlist
\o In the \gui Library view, \gui Resources tab, select states.png and
drag and drop it to the canvas.
\image qmldesigner-tutorial-user-icon.png "Image properties"
\list a
\o In the \gui Id field, enter \e icon.
\o In the \gui Position field, set \gui X to 10 and \gui Y to 20.
\endlist
\o In the \gui Library view, \gui Items tab, select \gui Rectangle,
drag and drop it to the canvas, and edit its properties.
\image qmldesigner-tutorial-topleftrect.png "Rectangle properties"
\list a
\o In the \gui Id field, enter \e topLeftRect.
\o In the \gui Size field, set \gui W and \gui H to 64, for the rectangle size
to match the image size.
\o In the \gui Colors tab, \gui Rectangle field, click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-transparent-button.png
button to make the rectangle transparent.
\o In the \gui Border field, set the border color to #808080.
\o In the \gui Rectangle tab, \gui Border field, set the border width to
1.
\note If the \gui Border field does not appear after you set the border
color, try setting the border color to solid by clicking the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-solid-color-button.png
button.
\o In the \gui Radius field, select 6 to create rounded corners for the
rectangle.
\o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the top and left anchor buttons
to anchor the rectangle to the top left corner of the page.
\image qmldesigner-tutorial-topleftrect-layout.png "Layout tab"
\o In the \gui Margin field, select 20 for the top anchor and 10 for
the left anchor.
\endlist
\o In the \gui Navigator pane, drag and drop the \gui {Mouse Area} element from
\e page to \e topLeftRect to make it apply only to the rectangle and not to the whole
page.
\o Edit \gui {Mouse Area} properties:
\list a
\o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
button to anchor the mouse area to the rectangle.
\o In the code editor, edit the pointer to the clicked expression in the mouse
area element, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
\qml
MouseArea {
anchors.fill: parent
onClicked: page.state = ''
}
\endqml
The expression sets the state to the base state and returns the image to
its initial position.
\endlist
\o In the \gui Navigator pane, copy topLeftRect (by pressing \key {Ctrl+C}) and
paste it to the canvas twice
(by pressing \key {Ctrl+V}). Qt Creator renames the new instances of the element
topLeftRect1 and topLeftRect2.
\o Select topLeftRect1 and edit its properties:
\list a
\o In the \gui Id field, enter \e middleRightRect.
\o In \gui {Layout}, select the vertical center anchor button and
then the right anchor button to
anchor the rectangle to the middle right margin of the screen.
\o In the \gui Margin field, select 10 for the right anchor and 0 for
the vertical center anchor.
\o In the code editor,add a pointer to a clicked expression to the
mouse area element. The following expression sets the state to \e State1:
\c {onClicked: page.state = 'State1'}
You will create State1 later.
\endlist
\o Select topLeftRect2 and edit its properties:
\list a
\o In the \gui Id field, enter \e bottomLeftRect.
\o In \gui {Layout}, select the bottom and left anchor buttons to
anchor the rectangle to the bottom left margin of the screen.
\o In the \gui Margin field, select 20 for the bottom anchor and 10 for
the left anchor.
\o In the code editor, add a pointer to a clicked expression to the
mouse area element. The following expression sets the state to \e State2:
\c {onClicked: page.state = 'State2'}
You will create State2 later.
\endlist
\o Press \key {Ctrl+S} to save the changes.
\o Press \key {Ctrl+R} to run the application in the QML Viewer.
\endlist
\image qmldesigner-tutorial.png "States and transitions example"
You should see the Qt logo in the top left rectangle, and two additional
rectangles in the center right and bottom left of the screen.
You can now create additional states to add views to the application.
\section1 Adding Views
In the .qml file, you already created pointers to two additional states:
State1 and State2. To create the states:
\list 1
\o Click the empty slot in the \gui States pane to create State1.
\o Click the empty slot in the \gui States pane to create State2.
\o In the code editor, bind the position of the Qt logo to the rectangle
to make sure that the logo is displayed within the rectangle when the view
is scaled on different sizes of screens. Set expressions for the x and y
properties, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
\snippet snippets/qml/states-properties.qml states
\image qmldesigner-tutorial-state1.png "States"
\note When you set the expressions, drag and drop is disabled for
the icon in \QMLD.
\o Press \key {Ctrl+R} to run the application in the QML Viewer.
\endlist
Click the rectangles to move the Qt logo from one rectangle to another.
\section1 Adding Animation to the View
Add transitions to define how the properties change when the Qt logo moves
between states. The transitions apply animations to the Qt logo. For example,
the Qt logo bounces back when it moves to the middleRightRect and eases into
bottomLeftRect. Add the transitions in the code editor.
\list 1
\o In the code editor, add the following code to specify that when moving to
State1, the x and y coordinates of the Qt logo change linearly over a duration
of 1 second:
\snippet snippets/qml/list-of-transitions.qml first transition
\o You can use the Qt Quick toolbar for animation to change the easing curve
type from linear to OutBounce:
\list a
\o Click \gui NumberAnimation in the code editor to display the
\inlineimage qml-toolbar-indicator.png
icon, and then click the icon to open the toolbar:
\image qmldesigner-tutorial-quick-toolbar.png "Qt Quick toolbar for animation"
\o In the \gui Easing field, select \gui Bounce.
\o In the \gui Subtype field, select \gui Out.
\endlist
\o Add the following code to specify that when moving to State2, the x and y
coordinates of the Qt logo change over a duration of 2 seconds,
and an InOutQuad easing function is used:
\snippet snippets/qml/list-of-transitions.qml second transition
\o Add the following code to specify that for any other state changes, the x
and y coordinates of the Qt logo change linearly over a duration of 200
milliseconds:
\snippet snippets/qml/list-of-transitions.qml default transition
\o Press \key {Ctrl+R} to run the application in the QML Viewer.
\endlist
Click the rectangles to view the animated transitions.
\section1 Deploying the Application to Mobile Devices
To deploy the application to mobile devices, use the \gui {Qt Quick Application} wizard
to convert it into a Qt Quick application. For more information, see
\l{Importing QML Applications}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-build-example-application.html
\page creator-writing-program.html
\nextpage creator-mobile-example.html
\title Creating a Qt Widget Based Application
This tutorial describes how to use Qt Creator
to create a small Qt application, Text Finder. It is a simplified version of the
QtUiTools \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/uitools-textfinder.html}{Text Finder}
example.
The application user interface is constructed from Qt widgets by using \QD.
The application logic is written in C++ by using the code editor.
\image qtcreator-textfinder-screenshot.png
\section1 Creating the Text Finder Project
\note Create the project with two instances of Qt Creator open and the \gui{Help} mode
active in one of them so that you can follow
these instructions while you work.
\list 1
\o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt Widget Project > Qt Gui
Application > Choose}.
\image qtcreator-new-qt-gui-application.png "New File or Project dialog"
The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-intro-and-location-qt-gui.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
\o In the \gui{Name} field, type \bold {TextFinder}.
\o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
\c {C:\Qt\examples}, and then click \gui{Next}.
The \gui {Target Setup} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-new-project-qt-versions-qt-gui.png "Target Setup dialog"
\o Select the Qt versions to use as build targets for your project, and click
\gui{Next}.
\note If you have only one Qt version installed, this dialog is skipped.
The \gui{Class Information} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-class-info-qt-gui.png "Class Information dialog"
\o In the \gui{Class name} field, type \bold {TextFinder} as the class name.
\o In the \gui{Base class} list, select \bold {QWidget} as the base class type.
\note The \gui{Header file}, \gui{Source file} and
\gui{Form file} fields are automatically updated to match the name of the
class.
\o Click \gui{Next}.
The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-new-project-summary-qt-gui.png "Project Management dialog"
\o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
\endlist
The TextFinder project now contains the following files:
\list
\o textfinder.h
\o textfinder.cpp
\o main.cpp
\o textfinder.ui
\o textfinder.pro
\endlist
\image qtcreator-textfinder-contents.png "TextFinder project contents"
The .h and .cpp files come with the necessary boiler plate code.
The .pro file is complete.
\section1 Filling in the Missing Pieces
Begin by designing the user interface and then move on to filling
in the missing code. Finally, add the find functionality.
\section2 Designing the User Interface
\image qtcreator-textfinder-ui.png "Text Finder UI"
\list 1
\o In the \gui{Editor} mode, double-click the textfinder.ui file in the \gui{Projects}
view to launch the integrated \QD.
\o Drag and drop the following widgets to the form:
\list
\o \gui{Label} (QLabel)
\o \gui{Line Edit} (QLineEdit)
\o \gui{Push Button} (QPushButton)
\endlist
\image qtcreator-textfinder-ui-widgets.png "Adding widgets to Text Finder UI"
\note To easily locate the widgets, use the search box at the top of the
\gui Sidebar. For example, to find the \gui Label widget, start typing
the word \bold label.
\image qtcreator-texfinder-filter.png "Filter field"
\o Double-click the \gui{Label} widget and enter the text \bold{Keyword}.
\o Double-click the \gui{Push Button} widget and enter the text \bold{Find}.
\o In the \gui Properties pane, change the \gui objectName to \bold findButton.
\image qtcreator-textfinder-objectname.png "Changing object names"
\o Press \key {Ctrl+A} to select the widgets and click \gui{Lay out Horizontally}
(or press \gui{Ctrl+H}) to apply a horizontal layout
(QHBoxLayout).
\image qtcreator-texfinder-ui-horizontal-layout.png "Applying horizontal layout"
\o Drag and drop a \gui{Text Edit} widget (QTextEdit)
to the form.
\o Select the screen area and click \gui{Lay out Vertically} (or press \gui{Ctrl+L})
to apply a vertical layout (QVBoxLayout).
\image qtcreator-textfinder-ui.png "Text Finder UI"
Applying the horizontal and vertical layouts ensures that the application UI scales to different
screen sizes.
\o To call a find function when users press the \gui Find button, you use the Qt signals
and slots mechanism. A signal is emitted when a particular event occurs and a slot is
a function that is called in response to a particular signal. Qt widgets have predefined
signals and slots that you can use directly from \QD. To add a slot for the find function:
\list
\o Right-click the \gui Find button to open a context-menu.
\o Select \gui {Go to Slot > clicked()}, and then select \gui OK.
A private slot, \c{on_findButton_clicked()}, is added to the header file,
textfinder.h and a private function, \c{TextFinder::on_findButton_clicked()},
is added to the source file, textfinder.cpp.
\endlist
\o Press \gui{Ctrl+S} to save your changes.
\endlist
For more information about designing forms with \QD, see the
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/designer-manual.html}{Qt Designer Manual}.
\section2 Completing the Header File
The textfinder.h file already has the necessary #includes, a
constructor, a destructor, and the \c{Ui} object. You need to add a private
function, \c{loadTextFile()}, to read and display the
contents of the input text file in the
QTextEdit.
\list 1
\o In the \gui{Projects} pane in the \gui {Edit view}, double-click the \c{textfinder.h} file
to open it for editing.
\o Add a private function
to the \c{private} section, after the \c{Ui::TextFinder} pointer, as
illustrated by the following code snippet:
\snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.h 0
\endlist
\section2 Completing the Source File
Now that the header file is complete, move on to the source file,
textfinder.cpp.
\list 1
\o In the \gui{Projects} pane in the \gui Edit view, double-click the textfinder.cpp file
to open it for editing.
\o Add code to load a text file using
QFile, read it with QTextStream, and
then display it on \c{textEdit} with
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtextedit.html#plainText-prop}{setPlainText()}.
This is illustrated by the following code snippet:
\snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 0
\o To use QFile and QTextStream, add the
following #includes to textfinder.cpp:
\snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 1
\o For the \c{on_findButton_clicked()} slot, add code to extract the search string and
use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtextedit.html#find}{find()} function
to look for the search string within the text file. This is illustrated by
the following code snippet:
\snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 2
\o Once both of these functions are complete, add a line to call \c{loadTextFile()} in
the constructor, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
\snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 3
\endlist
The \c{on_findButton_clicked()} slot is called automatically in
the uic generated ui_textfinder.h file by this line of code:
\code
QMetaObject::connectSlotsByName(TextFinder);
\endcode
\section2 Creating a Resource File
You need a resource file (.qrc) within which you embed the input
text file. The input file can be any .txt file with a paragraph of text.
Create a text file called input.txt and store it in the textfinder
folder.
To add a resource file:
\list 1
\o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt > Qt Resource File > Choose}.
\image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard.png "New File or Project dialog"
The \gui {Choose the Location} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard2.png "Choose the Location dialog"
\o In the \gui{Name} field, enter \bold{textfinder}.
\o In the \gui{Path} field, enter \c{C:\Qt\examples\TextFinder},
and click \gui{Next}.
The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard3.png "Project Management dialog"
\o In the \gui{Add to project} field, select \bold{TextFinder.pro}
and click \gui{Finish} to open the file in the code editor.
\o Select \gui{Add > Add Prefix}.
\o In the \gui{Prefix} field, replace the default prefix with a slash (/).
\o Select \gui{Add > Add Files}, to locate and add input.txt.
\image qtcreator-add-resource.png "Editing resource files"
\endlist
\section1 Compiling and Running Your Program
Now that you have all the necessary files, click the \inlineimage qtcreator-run.png
button to compile and run your program.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-project-generic.html
\page creator-version-control.html
\nextpage adding-plugins.html
\title Using Version Control Systems
Version control systems supported by Qt Creator are:
\table
\header
\i Version Control System
\i Address
\i Notes
\row
\i Bazaar
\i \l{http://bazaar.canonical.com/}
\i Qt Creator 2.2 and later
\row
\i CVS
\i \l{http://www.cvshome.org}
\i
\row
\i Git
\i \l{http://git-scm.com/}
\i
\row
\i Mercurial
\i \l{http://mercurial.selenic.com/}
\i Qt Creator 2.0 and later
\row
\i Perforce
\i \l{http://www.perforce.com}
\i Server version 2006.1 and later
\row
\i Subversion
\i \l{http://subversion.apache.org/}
\i
\endtable
\section1 Setting Up Version Control Systems
Qt Creator uses the version control system's command line clients to access
your repositories. To allow access, make sure that the command line clients
can be located using the \c{PATH} environment variable or specify the path to
the command line client executables in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
\gui {Version Control}.
After you set up the version control system, use the command line to check
that everything works (for example, use the status command). If no issues arise,
you should be ready to use the system also from Qt Creator.
\section2 Using msysGit on Windows
If you configure Git for use with \c {git bash}, only, and use SSH
authorization, Git looks for the SSH keys in the directory where the
\c HOME environment points to. The variable is always set by \c {git bash}.
However, the variable is typically not set in a Windows command prompt.
When you run Git from a Windows command prompt, it looks for the SSH keys in its
installation directory, and therefore, the authorization fails.
You can set the \c HOME environment variable from Qt Creator. Select \gui {Tools >
Options... > Version Control > Git}. Select the \gui {Environment Variables}
and the \gui {Set "HOME" environment variable} check boxes. \c HOME is set to
\c %HOMEDRIVE%%HOMEPATH% when the Git executable is run and authorization works
as it would with \c {git bash}.
\section1 Setting Up Common Options
Select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Version Control} > \gui{Common}
to specify settings for submit messages:
\list
\o \gui{Submit message check script} is a script or program that
can be used to perform checks on the submit message before
submitting. The submit message is passed in as the script's first
parameter. If there is an error, the script should output a
message on standard error and return a non-zero exit code.
\o \gui{User/alias configuration file} takes a file in mailmap format
that lists user names and aliases. For example:
\code
Jon Doe
Hans Mustermann hm
\endcode
\note The second line above specifies the alias \e{hm} and the
corresponding email address for \e{Hans Mustermann}. If the
user/alias configuration file is present, the submit editor
displays a context menu with \gui{Insert name...} that pops up a
dialog letting the user select a name.
\o \gui{User fields configuration file} is a simple text file
consisting of lines specifying submit message fields that take
user names, for example:
\code
Reviewed-by:
Signed-off-by:
\endcode
The fields above appear below the submit message. They provide completion
for the aliases/public user names specified in the
\e{User/alias configuration file} as well as a button that opens the
aforementioned user name dialog.
\o \gui{SSH prompt command} specifies an ssh-askpass command that you
can use (on Linux) to prompt the user for a password when using SSH.
For example, \c ssh-askpass or \c x11-ssh-askpass, depending on the
ssh-askpass implementation that you use.
\endlist
\section1 Creating VCS Repositories for New Projects
Qt Creator allows you to create repositories for version
control systems that support local repository creation, such as
Git, Mercurial, or Bazaar.
When creating a new project by selecting \gui File >
\gui{New File or Project...}, you can choose a version
control system in the final wizard page.
You can also select \gui Tools and then select \gui {Create Repository...}
in the submenu for the version control system.
To import a project that is under version control, choose \gui {File >
New File or Project... > Project from Version Control} and select the
version control system that you use. Follow the instructions of the
wizard to import the project.
\section1 Using Version Control Systems
The \gui{Tools} menu contains a submenu for each supported version
control system.
The \gui{Version Control} output pane displays the commands
that are executed, a timestamp, and the relevant output.
Select \gui {Window > Output Panes > Version Control} to open
the pane.
\image qtcreator-vcs-pane.png
\section2 Adding Files
When you create a new file or a new project, the wizard displays a page
asking whether the files should be added to a version control system.
This happens when the parent directory or the project is already
under version control and the system supports the concept of adding files,
for example, Perforce and Subversion. Alternatively, you can
add files later by using the version control tool menus.
With Git, there is no concept of adding files. Instead, all modified
files must be staged for a commit.
\section2 Viewing Diff Output
All version control systems provide menu options to \e{diff} the current
file or project: to compare it with the latest version stored in the
repository and to display the differences. In Qt Creator, a diff is
displayed in a read-only editor. If the file is accessible, you can
double-click on a selected diff chunk and Qt Creator opens an editor
displaying the file, scrolled to the line in question.
\image qtcreator-vcs-diff.png
\section2 Viewing Versioning History and Change Details
Display the versioning history of a file by selecting \gui{Log}
or \gui{Filelog}. Typically, the log output contains the date, the commit
message, and a change or revision identifier. Click on the identifier to
display a description of the change including the diff.
Right-clicking on an identifier brings up a context menu that lets you
show annotation views of previous versions (see \l{Annotating Files}).
\image qtcreator-vcs-log.png
\section2 Annotating Files
Annotation views are obtained by selecting \gui{Annotate} or \gui{Blame}.
Selecting \gui{Annotate} or \gui{Blame} displays the lines of the file
prepended by the change identifier they originate from. Clicking on the
change identifier shows a detailed description of the change.
To show the annotation of a previous version, right-click on the
version identifier at the beginning of a line and choose one of the
revisions shown at the bottom of the context menu. This allows you to
navigate through the history of the file and obtain previous versions of
it. It also works for Git and Mercurial using SHA's.
The same context menu is available when right-clicking on a version
identifier in the file log view of a single file.
\section2 Committing Changes
Once you have finished making changes, submit them to the version control
system by choosing \gui{Commit} or \gui{Submit}. Qt Creator displays a
commit page containing a text editor where you can enter your commit
message and a checkable list of modified files to be included.
\image qtcreator-vcs-commit.png
When you have finished filling out the commit page information, click on
\gui{Commit} to start committing.
The \gui{Diff Selected Files} button brings up a diff view of the
files selected in the file list. Since the commit page is just another
editor, you can go back to it by closing the diff view. You can also check
a diff view from the editor combo box showing the \gui{Opened files}.
\section2 Reverting Changes
All supported version control system support reverting your project to
known states. This functionality is generally called \e reverting.
The changes discarded depend on the version control system.
A version control system can replace the \gui Revert menu option with other
options.
\section3 Reverting Changes Using Git
The Git version control system has an index that is used to stage
changes. The index is commited on the next commit. Git allows you to revert
back to the state of the last commit as well as to the state staged in the
index.
\list
\o \gui{Undo Unstaged Changes} reverts all changes and resets the working
directory to the state of the index.
\o \gui{Undo Uncommitted Changes} reverts all changes, discarding the index.
This returns your working copy to the state it was in right after the last commit.
\endlist
\section2 Viewing Status
You can select \gui{Status...} to view the status of the project or
repository.
\section2 Updating the Working Tree
You can select \gui Update to update your working tree with the latest
changes from the branch. Some version control systems allow you to choose
between updating the current project and updating all projects.
With Git, you stash your changes and then pull the changes from the
repository.
\section2 Deleting Files
You can select \gui Delete to delete obsolete files from the repository.
With Git, you delete the files from the working tree and then stage the
deleted files for a commit.
\section2 Using Additional Bazaar Functions
Bazaar is a free version control system sponsored by Canonical.
The \gui Bazaar submenu contains the following additional items:
\table
\header
\o Menu Item
\o Description
\row
\i \gui{Pull...}
\i Turn the branch into a mirror of another branch.
\row
\i \gui{Push...}
\i Update a mirror of the branch.
\endtable
\section2 Using Additional CVS Functions
CVS is an open source version control system.
The \gui CVS submenu contains the following additional items:
\table
\header
\o Menu Item
\o Description
\row
\i \gui{Edit}
\i Open a file for editing.
\row
\i \gui{Push...}
\i Push changes to the remote repository.
\row
\i \gui{Unedit}
\i Discard the changes that you made in a file.
\endtable
\section2 Using Additional Git Functions
Git is a fast decentralized version control system. Git is available
for Windows, Linux and Mac.
The \gui Git submenu contains the following additional items:
\table
\header
\o Menu Item
\o Description
\row
\i \gui {Patch > Apply from Editor/Apply from File...}
\i Patches are rewriting instructions that can be applied to a set of files.
You can either apply a patch file that is open in Qt Creator or select
the patch file to apply from the file system.
\row
\i \gui{Pull}
\i Pull changes from the remote repository. If there are locally
modified files, you are prompted to stash those changes. Select \gui{Tools >
Options... > Version Control > Git} and select the \gui {Pull with rebase}
check box to perform a rebase operation while pulling.
\row
\i \gui{Clean.../Clean Project...}
\i All files that are not under version control (with the exception
of patches and project files) are displayed in the \gui {Clean Repository}
dialog. Select the files to delete and click \gui Delete. This allows you to
clean a build completely.
\row
\i \gui{Launch gitk}
\i Start the commit viewer for Git, gitk.
\row
\i \gui{Branches...}
\i Display the \gui Branch dialog that shows the local branches at the
top and remote branches at the bottom. To switch to a local branch,
double-click it. Double-clicking on a remote branch first creates a local
branch with the same name that tracks the remote branch, and then switches
to it.
\image qtcreator-vcs-gitbranch.png
\row
\i \gui {Stage File for Commit}
\i Mark new or modified files for committing to the repository.
To undo this function, select \gui {Unstage File from Commit}.
\row
\i \gui{Show Commit...}
\i Select a commit to view. Enter the SHA of the commit
in the \gui Change field.
\row
\i \gui{Amend Last Commit...}
\i Revert the last commit.
\endtable
\section3 Using Stashes
With Git, you can put your current set of changes onto a virtual shelf called a \e stash.
Stashes are useful, for example, to put aside a set of changes to work on higher
priority tasks or to pull in new chages from another repository.
Qt Creator exposes this functionality in the \gui{Tools > Git > Stash} menu.
\table
\header
\o Menu Item
\o Description
\row
\i \gui{Stashes...}
\i Display a dialog that shows all known stashes with options to restore,
display or delete them.
\row
\i \gui{Stash}
\i Stash all local changes. The working copy is then reset to
the state it had right after the last commit.
\row
\i \gui{Stash Snapshot...}
\i Save a snapshot of your current work under a name for later reference. The
working copy is unchanged.
For example, if you want to try something and find out later that it does not work,
you can discard it and return to the state of the snapshot.
\row
\i \gui{Stash Pop}
\i Remove a single stashed state from the stash list and apply it on
top of the current working tree state.
\endtable
\section2 Using Additional Mercurial Functionality
Mercurial is a free, distributed source control management tool.
The \gui Mercurial submenu contains the following additional items:
\table
\header
\o Menu Item
\o Description
\row
\i \gui{Import}
\i Apply changes from a patch file.
\row
\i \gui{Incoming}
\i Monitor the status of a remote repository by listing
the changes that will be pulled.
\row
\i \gui{Outgoing}
\i Monitor the status of a remote repository by listing
the changes that will be pushed.
\row
\i \gui{Pull}
\i Pull changes from the remote repository.
\row
\i \gui{Push}
\i Push changes to the remote repository.
\endtable
\section2 Using Additional Perforce Functions
Perforce is a fast software configuration management system developed by
Perforce Software.
When you start Qt Creator, it looks for the executable specified
in the \gui{P4 command} field in \gui{Tools > Options... > Version
Control > Perforce}. If the file is not found, the following error
message is displayed in the \gui {Version Control} output pane:
\gui {Perforce: Unable to determine the repository: "p4.exe"
terminated with exit code 1}. If you use Perforce, check that the
path to the executable is specified correctly in the \gui{P4 command}
field.
If you do not use Perforce, you can disable the Perforce plugin to
get rid of the error message. Choose \gui {Help > About Plugins} and
deselect the \gui Load check box for the \gui Perforce plugin in the
\gui {Version Control} group.
The \gui Perforce submenu contains the following additional items:
\table
\header
\o Menu Item
\o Description
\row
\i \gui{Describe...}
\i View information about changelists and the files in them.
\row
\i \gui{Edit File}
\i Open a file for editing.
\row
\i \gui{Opened}
\i List files that are open for editing.
\row
\i \gui{Pending Changes...}
\i Group files for commit.
\endtable
\section2 Using Additional Subversion Functions
Subversion is an open source version control system.
The \gui Subversion submenu contains the following additional items:
\table
\header
\o Menu Item
\o Description
\row
\i \gui{Describe...}
\i Display commit log messages for a revision.
\endtable
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage qt-quick-toolbars.html
\page creator-editor-locator.html
\nextpage creator-editor-codepasting.html
\title Searching With the Locator
The locator provides one of the easiest ways in Qt Creator to browse
through projects, files, classes, methods, documentation and file systems.
You can find the locator in the bottom left of the Qt Creator window.
To activate the locator, press \key Ctrl+K (\key Cmd+K on Mac OS
X) or select \gui Tools > \gui Locate....
\image qtcreator-locator.png
To edit the currently open project's main.cpp file using the locator:
\list 1
\o Activate the locator by pressing \key Ctrl+K.
\o Enter \tt{main.cpp}.
\image qtcreator-locator-open.png
\o Press \key Return.
The main.cpp file opens in the editor.
\endlist
It is also possible to enter only a part of a search string.
As you type, the locator shows the occurrences of that string regardless
of where in the name of an component it appears.
To narrow down the search results, you can use the following wildcard
characters:
\list
\o To match any number of any or no characters, enter \bold{*}.
\o To match a single instance of any character, enter \bold{?}.
\endlist
\section1 Using the Locator Filters
The locator allows you to browse not only files, but any items
defined by \bold{locator filters}. By default, the locator contains
filters for:
\list
\o Locating any open document
\o Locating files anywhere on your file system
\o Locating iles belonging to your project, such as source, header resource,
and .ui files
\o Locating class and method definitions in your project or anywhere
referenced
from your project
\o Locating class and method definitions in the current document
\o Locating a specific line in the document displayed in your editor
\o Opening help topics, including Qt documentation
\o Performing web searches
\o Running text editing macros that you record and save. For more
information, see \l{Using Text Editing Macros}
\endlist
To use a specific locator filter, type the assigned prefix followed by
\key Space. The prefix is usually a single character.
For example, to locate symbols matching
QDataStream:
\list 1
\o Activate the locator.
\o Enter \tt{\bold{: QDataStream}} (: (colon) followed by a
\key Space and the symbol name (QDataStream)).
The locator lists the results.
\image qtcreator-navigate-popup.png
\endlist
By default the following filters are enabled and you do not need to use
their prefixes explicitly:
\list
\o Going to a line in the current file (l).
\o Going to an open file (o).
\o Going to a file in any open project (a).
\endlist
\section2 Using the Default Locator Filters
The following locator filters are available by default:
\table
\header
\o Function
\o Enter in locator
\o Example
\row
\o Go to a line in the current file.
\o \tt{\bold{l \e{Line number}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-line.png
\row
\o Go to a symbol definition.
\o \tt{\bold{: \e{Symbol name}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-symbols.png
\row
\o Go to a symbol definition in the current file.
\o \tt{\bold{. \e{Symbol name}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-method-list.png
\row
\o Go to a help topic.
\o \tt{\bold{? \e{Help topic}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-help.png
\row
\o Search for a term by using a web search engine.
\o \tt{\bold{r \e{Search term}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-web.png
\row
\o Go to an open file.
\o \tt{\bold{o \e{File name}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-opendocs.png
\row
\o Go to a file in the file system (browse the file system).
\o \tt{\bold{f \e{File name}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-filesystem.png
\row
\o Go to a file in any project currently open.
\o \tt{\bold{a \e{File name}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-files.png
\row
\o Go to a file in the current project.
\o \tt{\bold{p \e{File name}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-current-project.png
\row
\o Go to a class definition.
\o \tt{\bold{c \e{Class name}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-classes.png
\row
\o Go to a method definition.
\o \tt{\bold{m \e{Method name}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-methods.png
\row
\o Execute a text editing macro.
\o \tt{\bold{rm \e{Macro name}}}
\o \image qtcreator-locator-macros.png
\endtable
\section2 Creating Locator Filters
To quickly access files not directly mentioned in your project, you can
create your own locator filters. That way you can locate files in a
directory structure you have defined.
To create a locator filter:
\list 1
\o In the locator, click \inlineimage qtcreator-locator-magnify.png
and select \gui Configure.... to open the \gui Locator options.
\image qtcreator-locator-customize.png
\o Click \gui Add.
\o In the \gui{Filter Configuration} dialog:
\list
\o Name your filter.
\o Select at least one directory. The locator searches directories
recursively.
\o Define the file pattern as a comma separated list. For example,
to search all .h and .cpp files, enter \bold{*.h,*.cpp}
\o Specify the prefix string.
To show only results matching this filter, select
\gui{Limit to prefix}.
\image qtcreator-navigate-customfilter.png
\endlist
\o Click OK.
\endlist
\section2 Adding Web Search Engines
You can use the \gui {Web Search (\c r)} locator filter to perform
web searches. URLs and search commands for Bing, Google, Yahoo! Search,
cplusplus.com, and Wikipedia are configured by default.
To find out the format of the search command to use for your favorite
web search engine, perform a search in your browser and copy the resulting
URL to the locator filter configuration. Replace the search term with the
variable \c {%1}.
To add URLs and search commands to the list:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Tools > Options > Locator > Web Search (prefix: r) >
Edit}.
\o Select \gui Add to add a new entry to the list.
\image qtcreator-add-online-doc.png "Filter Configuration dialog"
\o Double-click the new entry to specify a URL and a search command.
For example, http://www.google.com/search?q=%1.
\o Click \gui OK.
\endlist
\section2 Configuring the Locator Cache
The locator searches the files matching your file pattern in the
directories you have selected and caches that information. The cache for
all default filters is updated as you write your code. By default,
Qt Creator updates the filters created by you once an hour.
To update the cached information manually, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-locator-magnify.png
and select \gui Refresh.
To set a new cache update time:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Locator.
\o In \gui{Refresh interval}, define new time in minutes.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-developing-symbian.html
\page creator-project-managing-sessions.html
\nextpage creator-coding.html
\title Managing Sessions
When you exit Qt Creator, a snapshot of your current workspace is stored
as a \e session. To restore the session automatically when you start Qt
Creator, select \gui {File > Session Manager > Restore last session on
startup}.
A session is an arbitrary collection of:
\list
\o Open projects with their dependencies (including SUBDIRS projects)
\o Open editors
\o Breakpoints and watches
\o Bookmarks
\endlist
A session is personal, that is, not meant to be shared. It is not
supposed to reflect the project structure. It contains personal data, such as
bookmarks and breakpoints that are usually not of interest to other developers
working on the same projects.
For example, if you work on a project and need to switch to another project for a
while, you can save your workspace as a session. This makes it easier
to return to working on the first project later.
To create a new session or remove existing sessions, select \gui File >
\gui{Session Manager}.
\image qtcreator-session-manager.png
To switch between sessions, choose
\gui {File > Session Manager}. If you do not create or select a session,
Qt Creator always uses the default session, which was created the
last time you exited Qt Creator.
When you launch Qt Creator, a list of existing sessions is displayed on the
\gui{Welcome screen}.
\image qtcreator-welcome-session.png
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-build-dependencies.html
\page creator-debugging.html
\nextpage creator-debugging-example.html
\title Debugging
Qt Creator provides a debugger plugin that acts
as an interface between the Qt Creator core and external native debuggers
such as the GNU Symbolic Debugger (GDB), the Microsoft Console Debugger (CDB),
and a QML/JavaScript debugger.
The following sections describe debugging with Qt Creator:
\list
\o \l{Debugging the Example Application} uses an example application
to illustrate how to debug Qt C++ applications in the \gui Debug
mode.
\o \l{Launching the Debugger} describes the
operating modes in which the debugger plugin runs, depending on
where and how the process is started and run.
\o \l{Interacting with the Debugger} describes the views and functions
available in the \gui Debug mode.
\o \l{Setting Up Debugger} summarizes the support for debugging C++
code and requirements for installation. Typically, the interaction
between Qt Creator and the native debugger is set up automatically
and you do not need to do anything.
\o \l{Using Debugging Helpers} describes how to get more detailed data
on complex data.
\o \l{Debugging Qt Quick Projects} describes how to debug Qt Quick
projects.
\o \l{Detecting Memory Leaks} describes how to use the Valgrind
Memcheck tool to detect problems in memory management.
\o \l{Troubleshooting Debugger} lists some typical problems that you
might encounter while debugging and solutions to them.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debugging-example.html
\page creator-debugger-operating-modes.html
\nextpage creator-debug-mode.html
\title Launching the Debugger
To start a program under the control of the debugger, select \gui{Debug} >
\gui{Start Debugging} > \gui{Start Debugging}, or press \key{F5}.
Qt Creator checks whether the compiled program is up-to-date, and rebuilds
it if necessary. The debugger then takes over and starts the program.
\note Starting a program in the debugger can take a long
time, typically in the range of several seconds to minutes if complex
features (like QtWebKit) are used.
The debugger is launched in the appropriate operating mode (plain, terminal,
or on-device), based on the build and run settings for the active project.
Select \gui Debug menu options to launch the debugger in other modes.
\note Debugging QML and JavaScript is supported only in plain mode.
\section1 Launching the Debugger in Different Modes
The debugger plugin runs in different operating modes depending on where and
how the process is started and run. Some of the modes are only available for
a particular operating system or platform.
You can launch the debugger in the following modes:
\list
\o \bold Plain to debug locally started applications, such as a
Qt based GUI application.
\o \bold Terminal to debug locally started processes that need a
console, typically without a GUI.
\o \bold Attach to debug local processes started outside Qt Creator.
\o \bold Remote to debug a process running on a different machine.
\o \bold Core to debug crashed processes on Unix.
\o \bold Post-mortem to debug crashed processes on Windows.
\o \bold On-device to debug processes running on a mobile device.
\endlist
\note Debugging QML and JavaScript is supported only in plain mode.
When you click the \gui {Start Debugging} button, the debugger is launched
in the appropriate operating mode (plain, terminal, or on-device), based on the
build and run settings for the active project. Select \gui Debug menu options
to launch the debugger in the other modes.
\section2 Launching in Plain Mode
To launch the debugger in the plain mode, click the \gui {Start Debugging}
button for the active project, or choose
\gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start and Debug External Application...}
and specify an executable.
\section2 Launching in Terminal Mode
To launch the debugger in the terminal mode, select \gui {Projects > Run Settings}
and select the \gui {Run in terminal} check box. Then click the
\gui {Start Debugging} button for the active project.
\section2 Launching in Attach Mode
To launch the debugger in the attach mode, select
\gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Attach to Running External Application...},
and then select a process by its name or process ID to attach to.
You can load the source project in advance and set breakpoints in it before
attaching to an already running process. For more information, see
\l{Setting Breakpoints}.
\section2 Launching in Remote Mode
The remote mode allows you to debug processes that run on remote machines.
\section3 Using GDB
In remote mode, the local GDB process talks to a GDB server
process running on the remote machine that controls the process to be
debugged.
The GDB server process is started on the remote machines by passing a port
number and the executable:
\code
gdbserver :1234
\endcode
It then typically responds:
\code
Process bin/qtcreator created; pid = 5159
Listening on port 1234
\endcode
On the local machine that runs Qt Creator:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start and Attach to Remote
Application...}.
\o In the \gui {Host and port} field, enter the name of the remote
machine and the port number to use.
\o Select \gui{OK} to start debugging.
\endlist
\section3 Using CDB
In remote mode, the local CDB process talks to a CDB process that
runs on the remote machine. The process is started with special
command line options that switch it into server mode. The remote CDB
process must load the Qt Creator CDB extension library that is shipped with
Qt Creator:
\list 1
\o Install the \e{Debugging Tools for Windows} on the remote machine.
The installation folder contains the CDB command line executable (cdb.exe).
\o Copy the Qt Creator CDB extension library from the Qt installation
directory to the a new folder on the remote machine
(32 or 64 bit version depending on the version of the Debugging
Tools for Windows
used):
\list
\o \c {\lib\qtcreatorcdbext32\qtcreatorcdbext.dll} (32 bit)
\o \c {\lib\qtcreatorcdbext64\qtcreatorcdbext.dll} (64 bit)
\endlist
\o Set the _NT_DEBUGGER_EXTENSION_PATH environment variable to point
to that folder.
\o To use TCP/IP as communication protocol, launch remote CDB as
follows:
\code
cdb.exe -server tcp:port=1234
\endcode
\o On the local machine running Qt Creator, select
\gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Attach to Remote CDB Session...}
\o In the \gui Connection field enter the connection parameters.
For example, for TCP/IP:
\code
Server:Port
\endcode
If you chose some other protocol, specify one of the alternative
formats:
\code
tcp:server=Server,port=Port[,password=Password][,ipversion=6]
tcp:clicon=Server,port=Port[,password=Password][,ipversion=6]
npipe:server=Server,pipe=PipeName[,password=Password]
com:port=COMPort,baud=BaudRate,channel=COMChannel[,password=Password]
spipe:proto=Protocol,{certuser=Cert|machuser=Cert},server=Server,pipe=PipeName[,password=Password]
ssl:proto=Protocol,{certuser=Cert|machuser=Cert},server=Server,port=Socket[,password=Password]
ssl:proto=Protocol,{certuser=Cert|machuser=Cert},clicon=Server,port=Socket[,password=Password]
\endcode
\o Click \gui{OK} to start debugging.
\endlist
\section2 Launching in Core Mode
The core mode it used to debug \e {core} files (crash dumps) that are
generated from crashed processes if the system is set up to allow this.
To enable the dumping of core files on a Unix system enter the following
command in the shell from which the application will be launched:
\code
ulimit -c unlimited
\endcode
To launch the debugger in the core mode, select
\gui{Debug > Start Debugging > Attach to Core...}.
\section2 Launching in Post-Mortem Mode
The post-mortem mode is available only on Windows, if you have installed
the debugging tools for Windows.
The Qt Creator installation program asks you whether you want to
register Qt Creator as a post-mortem debugger. To change the setting, select
\gui{Tools > Options... > Debugger > Common > Use Creator for post-mortem debugging}.
You can launch the debugger in the post-mortem mode if an application crashes
on Windows. Click the \gui {Debug in Qt Creator} button in the error message
that is displayed by the Windows operating system.
\section2 Launching in On-device Mode
The on-device mode is a special mode available for run configurations
targeting mobile devices. It debugs processes running on mobile
devices using on-device debugging agents, such as CODA on Symbian and
gdbserver on Maemo and MeeGo.
To launch the debugger in the on-device mode, open the project, select a
run configuration that targets a mobile device, and click the
\gui {Start Debugging} button.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debug-mode.html
\page creator-debugger-engines.html
\nextpage creator-debugging-helpers.html
\title Setting Up Debugger
\note The information in this section applies only to debugging the C++
language.
Typically, the interaction between Qt Creator and the native debugger is set
up automatically and you do not need to do anything. However, you might have an
unsupported GDB version installed, your Linux environment might not have GDB
installed at all, or you might want to use the debugging tools for Windows.
\note To use the debugging tools for Windows, you must install them and add the
Symbol Server provided by Microsoft to the symbol search path of the debugger.
For more information, see \l{Setting the Symbol Server in Windows}.
This section explains the
options you have for debugging C++ code and provides installation notes for the
supported native debuggers.
\section1 Supported Native Debugger Versions
The debugger plugin supports different builds of the GDB debugger, both
with and without the ability to use Python scripting. The Python enabled
versions are preferred, but they are not available on Mac and on older
versions of Linux.
On Windows, Symbian, and Maemo, only the Python version is supported.
The non-Python versions use the compiled version of the debugging helpers,
that you must enable separately. For more information, see
\l{Debugging Helpers Based on C++}.
The Python version uses a script version of the debugging helpers
that does not need any special setup.
The CDB native debugger has similar funtionality to the non-Python GDB debugger
engine. Specifically, it also uses compiled C++ code for the debugging
helper library.
The following table summarizes the support for debugging C++ code:
\table
\header
\o Platform
\o Compiler
\o Native Debugger
\o Python
\o Debugger Modes
\row
\o Linux
\o GCC
\o GDB
\o Yes
\o Plain, Terminal, Attach, Remote, Core
\row
\o Unix
\o GCC
\o GDB
\o Yes
\o Plain, Terminal, Attach, Remote, Core
\row
\o Mac OS
\o GCC
\o GDB
\o No
\o Plain, Terminal, Attach, Core
\row
\o Windows/MinGW
\o GCC
\o GDB
\o Yes
\o Plain, Terminal, Attach, Remote, Core
\row
\o Windows/MSVC
\o Microsoft Visual C++ Compiler
\o Debugging Tools for Windows/CDB
\o Not applicable
\o Plain, Terminal, Attach, Post-Mortem
\row
\o Symbian
\o GCC
\o GDB
\o Yes
\o On-device
\row
\o Maemo
\o GCC
\o GDB
\o Yes
\o On-device
\endtable
For more information on the debugger modes, see \l{Launching the Debugger in Different Modes}.
\omit
\section2 GDB Adapter Modes
[Advanced Topic]
The GDB native debugger used internally by the debugger plugin runs in
different adapter modes to cope with the variety
of supported platforms and environments. All GDB adapters inherit from
AbstractGdbAdapter:
\list
\o PlainGdbAdapter debugs locally started GUI processes.
It is physically split into parts that are relevant only when Python is
available, parts relevant only when Python is not available, and mixed code.
\o TermGdbAdapter debugs locally started processes that need a
console.
\o AttachGdbAdapter debugs local processes started outside Qt Creator.
\o CoreGdbAdapter debugs core files generated from crashes.
\o RemoteGdbAdapter interacts with the gdbserver running on Linux.
\o CodaGdbAdapter interacts with Symbian devices. The GDB protocol and
the GDB serial protocol are used between GDB and the adapter. The
target communication framework (TCF) protocol is used between the
adapter and the CODA debugging agent running on the device.
\endlist
\endomit
\section1 Installing Native Debuggers
There are various reasons why the debugger plugin may fail to automatically
pick up a suitable native debugger. The native debugger might be missing
(which is usually the case for the CDB debugger on Windows which always
needs to be installed manually by the user) or the installed version is not
supported.
Check the table below for the supported versions and other important
information about installing native debuggers.
\table
\header
\o Native Debugger
\o Notes
\row
\o GDB
\o On Linux and Windows, use the Python-enabled GDB versions that
are installed when you install Qt Creator and Qt SDK. On Mac OS X,
use the GDB provided with Xcode.
For a custom target, you can build your own Python-enabled GDB.
Follow the instructions on
\l{http://developer.qt.nokia.com/wiki/QtCreatorBuildGdb}{Building GDB}.
You must use at least Python version 2.5, but we recommend that you
use version 2.6.
\row
\o Debugging tools for Windows
\o Using this engine requires you to install the
\e{Debugging tools for Windows}
\l{http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/devtools/debugging/installx86.Mspx}
or
\l{http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/devtools/debugging/install64bit.Mspx}
package (Version 6.12 for the 32-bit or the 64-bit version
of Qt Creator, respectively),
which are freely available for download from the
\l{http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/default.aspx}{Microsoft Developer Network}.
The Qt Creator help browser does
not allow you to download files, and therefore, you must copy
the above links to a browser.
\note Visual Studio does not include the Debugging tools needed,
and therefore, you must install them separately.
The pre-built \QSDK for Windows makes use of the library if it
is present on the system. When manually building Qt Creator using
the Microsoft Visual C++ Compiler, the build process checks for the
required files in \c{"%ProgramFiles%\Debugging Tools for Windows"}.
It is highly recommended that you add the Symbol Server provided
by Microsoft to the symbol search path of the debugger. The Symbol
Server provides you with debugging informaton for the operating
system libraries for debugging Windows applications. For more
information, see \l{Setting the Symbol Server in Windows}.
\row
\o Debugging tools for Mac OS X
\o The Qt binary distribution contains both debug and release
variants of the libraries. But you have to explicitly tell the
runtime linker that you want to use the debug libraries even if
your application is compiled as debug as release is the default
library.
If you use a qmake based project in Qt Creator, you can set a
flag in your run configuration, in \gui Projects mode. In the run
configuration, select \gui{Use debug version of frameworks}.
For more detailed information about debugging on the Mac OS X, see:
\l{http://developer.apple.com/mac/library/technotes/tn2004/tn2124.html}{Mac OS X Debugging Magic}.
\note The Mac OS X Snow Leopard (10.6) has a bug that might cause the
application to crash. For a workaround, see:
\l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com/browse/QTBUG-4962}{QTBUG-4962}.
\endtable
\section1 Setting the Symbol Server in Windows
To obtain debugging information for the operating system libraries for
debugging Windows applications, add the Symbol Server provided
by Microsoft to the symbol search path of the debugger:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} > \gui Debugger > \gui CDB.
\o In the \gui {Symbol paths} field, open the \gui{Insert...} menu
and select \gui{Symbol Server...}.
\o Select a directory where you want to store the cached information
and click \gui OK.
Use a subfolder in a temporary directory, such as
\c {C:\temp\symbolcache}.
\endlist
\note Populating the cache might take a long time on a slow network
connection.
\note The first time you start debugging by using the
Debugging tools for Windows, Qt Creator prompts you to add the Symbol
Server.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debugger-operating-modes.html
\page creator-debug-mode.html
\nextpage creator-debugger-engines.html
\title Interacting with the Debugger
In \gui Debug mode, you can use several views to interact with the
program you are debugging. The availability of views depends on whether
you are debugging C++ or QML. Frequently used views are shown by
default and rarely used ones are hidden. To change the default settings,
select \gui {Window > Views}, and then select views to display or hide.
\image qtcreator-debugger-views.png "Debug mode views"
By default, the views are locked into place in the workspace. Select
\gui {Window > Views > Locked} to unlock the views. Drag and drop the
views into new positions on the screen. Drag view borders to resize the
views. The size and position of views are saved for future sessions.
\section1 Using the Debugger
Once the program starts running under the control of the debugger, it
behaves and performs as usual. You can interrupt a running C++ program by
selecting \gui{Debug} > \gui {Interrupt}. The program is automatically
interrupted when a breakpoint is hit.
Once the program stops, Qt Creator:
\list
\o Retrieves data representing the call stack at the program's current
position.
\o Retrieves the contents of local variables.
\o Examines \gui Watchers.
\o Updates the \gui Registers, \gui Modules, and \gui Disassembler
views if you are debugging the C++ based applications.
\endlist
You can use the \gui Debug mode views to examine the data in more detail.
You can use the following keyboard shortcuts:
\list
\o To finish debugging, press \key{Shift+F5}.
\o To execute a line of code as a whole, press \key{F10}.
\o To step into a function or a subfunction, press \key{F11}.
\o To continue running the program, press \key{F5}.
\o To run to the selected function when you are stepping into a nested
function, press \key{Ctrl+F6}.
\endlist
It is also possible to continue executing the program until the current
function completes or jump to an arbitrary position in the current function.
\section1 Setting Breakpoints
A breakpoint represents a position or sets of positions in the code that,
when executed, interrupts the program being debugged and passes the control
to you. You can then examine the state of the interrupted program, or
continue execution either line-by-line or continuously.
Qt Creator shows breakpoints in the \gui{Breakpoints} view which is enabled
by default. The \gui{Breakpoints} view is also accessible when the debugger
and the program being debugged is not running.
\image qtcreator-debug-breakpoints.png "Breakpoints view"
You can associate breakpoints with:
\list
\o Source code files and lines
\o Functions
\o Addresses
\o Throwing and catching exceptions
\o Executing and forking processes
\o Executing some system calls
\endlist
You can also set watchpoints to monitor the changes in a block of memory
at a particular address when a program is running.
The interruption of a program by a breakpoint can be restricted with
certain conditions.
To set a breakpoint at a particular line you want the program to stop,
click the left margin or press \key F9 (\key F8 for Mac OS X).
To set breakpoints and watchpoints select \gui {Add Breakpoint...} in
the context menu in the \gui Breakpoints view.
\image qtcreator-add-breakpoint.png "Add Breakpoints" dialog
\note You can remove a breakpoint:
\list
\o By clicking the breakpoint marker in the text editor.
\o By selecting the breakpoint in the breakpoint view and pressing
\key{Delete}.
\o By selecting \gui{Delete Breakpoint} from the context
menu in the \gui Breakpoints view.
\endlist
You can set and delete breakpoints before the program starts running or
while it is running under the debugger's control. Breakpoints are saved
together with a session.
\section2 Setting Watchpoints
To set a watchpoint at an address:
\list 1
\o Right-click in the \gui Breakpoints view to open the context menu,
and select \gui {Add Breakpoint...}.
\o In the \gui {Breakpoint type} field, select \gui {Address
(Watchpoint)}.
\o In the \gui Address field, specify the address of the memory block.
\o Select \gui OK.
\endlist
If the address is displayed in the \gui {Locals and Watchers} view, you can
select \gui {Add Watchpoint at Object's Address} in the context menu to set
the watchpoint.
\section1 Viewing Call Stack Trace
When the program being debugged is interrupted, Qt Creator displays the
nested function calls leading to the current position as a call stack
trace. This stack trace is built up from call stack frames, each
representing a particular function. For each function, Qt Creator tries
to retrieve the file name and line number of the corresponding source
file. This data is shown in the \gui Stack view.
\image qtcreator-debug-stack.png
Since the call stack leading to the current position may originate or go
through code for which no debug information is available, not all stack
frames have corresponding source locations. Stack frames without
corresponding source locations are grayed out in the \gui{Stack} view.
If you click a frame with a known source location, the text editor
jumps to the corresponding location and updates the \gui{Locals and Watchers}
view, making it seem like the program was interrupted before entering the
function.
\section1 Locals and Watchers
Whenever a program stops under the control of the debugger, it retrieves
information about the topmost stack frame and displays it in the
\gui{Locals and Watchers} view. The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view
typically includes information about parameters of the function in that
frame as well as the local variables.
\image qtcreator-watcher.png "Locals and Watchers view"
Compound variables of struct or class type are displayed as
expandable in the view. Expand entries to show
all members. Together with the display of value and type, you can
examine and traverse the low-level layout of object data.
\table
\row
\i \bold{Note:}
\row
\i GDB, and therefore Qt Creator's debugger works for optimized
builds on Linux and Mac OS X. Optimization can lead to
re-ordering of instructions or removal of some local variables,
causing the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view to show unexpected
data.
\row
\i The debug information provided by GCC does not include enough
information about the time when a variable is initialized.
Therefore, Qt Creator can not tell whether the contents of a
local variable contains "real data", or "initial noise". If a
QObject appears uninitialized, its value is reported as
\gui {not in scope}. Not all uninitialized objects, however, can be
recognized as such.
\endtable
The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view also provides access to the most
powerful feature of the debugger: comprehensive display of data belonging
to Qt's basic objects.
To enable Qt's basic objects data display feature:
\list
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui {Options...} > \gui Debugger >
\gui{Debugging Helper} and check the \gui{Use Debugging Helper}
checkbox.
\o The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view is reorganized to provide a
high-level view of the objects.
\endlist
For example, in case of QObject, instead of displaying a pointer to some
private data structure, you see a list of children, signals and slots.
Similarly, instead of displaying many pointers and integers, Qt Creator's
debugger displays the contents of a QHash or QMap in an orderly manner.
Also, the debugger displays access data for QFileInfo and provides
access to the "real" contents of QVariant.
You can use the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view to change the contents of
variables of simple data types, for example, \c int or \c float when the
program is interrupted. To do so, click the \gui Value column, modify
the value with the inplace editor, and press \key Enter (or \key Return).
You can enable tooltips in the main editor displaying this information.
For more information, see \l{Showing Tooltips in Debug Mode}.
\note The set of watched items is saved in your session.
\section1 Directly Interacting with Native Debuggers
In some cases, it is convenient to directly interact with the command
line of the native debugger. In Qt Creator, you can use the left
pane of the \gui {Debugger Log} view for that purpose. When you press
\key {Ctrl+Return}, the contents of the line under the text cursor
are sent directly to the native debugger. Alternatively, you
can use the line edit at the bottom of the view. Output is displayed in the
right pane of the \gui {Debugger Log} view.
\note Usually, you do not need this feature, because Qt Creator provides
you with better ways to handle the task. For example, instead of using the
GDB \c print command from the command line, you can create a watcher item
in the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view and examine the expression there.
\section1 Debugging C++ Based Applications
The following sections describe additional debugging functions that apply
only to debugging C++.
\section2 Starting the Debugger from the Command Line
You can use the Qt Creator debugger interface from the command line. To
attach it to a running process, specify the process ID as a parameter for
the \c {-debug} option. To examine a core file, specify the file name.
Qt Creator executes all the necessary steps, such as searching for
the binary that belongs to a core file.
For example:
\list
\o \c {C:\qtcreator\bin>qtcreator -debug 2000}
\o \c {C:\qtcreator\bin>qtcreator -debug core.2000}
\endlist
For more information, see \l{Using Command Line Options}.
\section2 Stepping into Frameworks in Mac OS
In Mac OS X, external libraries are usually built into so-called Frameworks,
which may contain both release and debug versions of the library. When you run
applications on the Mac OS desktop, the release version of Frameworks is used
by default. To step into Frameworks, select the \gui {Use debug versions of
Frameworks} option in the project run settings for \gui Desktop and
\gui {Qt Simulator} targets.
\section2 Viewing Threads
If a multi-threaded program is interrupted, the \gui Thread view or the
combobox named \gui Thread in the debugger's status bar can be used to
switch from one thread to another. The \gui Stack view adjusts itself
accordingly.
\section2 Viewing Modules
The \gui{Modules} view displays information that the debugger plugin has
about modules included in the application that is being debugged. A module
is a dynamic link library (.dll) in Windows, a shared object (.so) in
Linux, and a dynamic shared library (.dylib) in Mac OS.
In addition, the view displays symbols within the modules and indicates
where each module was loaded.
Right-click the view to open a context menu that contains menu items for:
\list
\o Updating the module list
\o Loading symbols for modules
\o Examining modules
\o Editing module files
\o Showing symbols in modules
\o Showing dependencies between modules (Windows only)
\endlist
By default, the \gui{Modules} view is hidden.
\section2 Viewing Source Files
The \gui{Source Files} view lists all the source files included in the project.
If you cannot step into an instruction, you can check whether the source file is
actually part of the project, or whether it was compiled
elsewhere. The view shows the path to each file in the file system.
Right-click the view to open a context menu that contains menu items for
reloading data and opening files.
By default, the \gui{Source Files} view is hidden.
\section2 Viewing Disassembled Code and Register State
The \gui{Disassembler} view displays disassembled code for the current
function. The \gui{Registers} view displays the current state of the CPU's
registers.
The \gui{Disassembler} view and the \gui{Registers} view are both useful
for low-level commands for checking single instructions, such as \gui{Step Into}
and \gui{Step Over}. By default, both \gui{Disassembler} and
\gui{Registers} view are hidden.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debugging.html
\page creator-debugging-example.html
\nextpage creator-debugger-operating-modes.html
\title Debugging the Example Application
This section uses the \l{Creating a Qt Widget Based Application}{TextFinder} example to
illustrate how to debug Qt C++ applications in the \gui Debug mode.
TextFinder
reads a text file into
QString and then displays it with QTextEdit.
To look at the example QString, \c{line}, and see the
stored data, place a breakpoint and view the QString object
data, as follows:
\list 1
\o Click in between the line number and the window border on the line
where we invoke \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qtextedit.html#plainText-prop}{setPlainText()}
to set a breakpoint.
\image qtcreator-setting-breakpoint1.png
\o Select \gui{Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging} or press \key{F5}.
\o To view the breakpoint, click the \gui{Breakpoints} tab.
\image qtcreator-setting-breakpoint2.png
\o To remove a breakpoint, right-click it and select \gui{Delete Breakpoint}.
\o To view the contents of \c{line}, go to the \gui{Locals and
Watchers} view.
\image qtcreator-watcher.png
\endlist
Modify the \c{on_findButton_clicked()} function to move back to
the start of the document and continue searching once the cursor hits the
end of the document. Add the following code snippet:
\code
void TextFinder::on_findButton_clicked()
{
QString searchString = ui->lineEdit->text();
QTextDocument *document = ui->textEdit->document();
QTextCursor cursor = ui->textEdit->textCursor();
cursor = document->find(searchString, cursor,
QTextDocument::FindWholeWords);
ui->textEdit->setTextCursor(cursor);
bool found = cursor.isNull();
if (!found && previouslyFound) {
int ret = QMessageBox::question(this, tr("End of Document"),
tr("I have reached the end of the document. Would you like "
"me to start searching from the beginning of the document?"),
QMessageBox::Yes | QMessageBox::No, QMessageBox::Yes);
if (ret == QMessageBox::Yes) {
cursor = document->find(searchString,
QTextDocument::FindWholeWords);
ui->textEdit->setTextCursor(cursor);
} else
return;
}
previouslyFound = found;
}
\endcode
If you compile and run the above code, however, the application does not
work correctly due to a logic error. To locate this logic error, step
through the code using the following buttons:
\image qtcreator-debugging-buttons.png
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debugger-engines.html
\page creator-debugging-helpers.html
\nextpage creator-debugging-qml.html
\title Using Debugging Helpers
Qt Creator is able to show complex data types in a customized,
user-extensible manner. For this purpose, it takes advantage of
two technologies, collectively referred to as \e{Debugging Helpers}.
Using the debugging helpers is not \e essential for debugging
with Qt Creator, but they enhance the user's ability to quickly
examine complex data significantly.
\section1 Debugging Helpers Based on C++
This is the first and original approach to display complex data
types. While it has been superseded on most platforms by the more
robust and more flexible second approch using Python scripting,
it is the only feasible one on Windows/MSVC, Mac OS, and
old Linux distributions. Moreover, this approach will automatically
be chosen as fallback in case the Python based approach fails.
During debugging with the C++ based debugging helpers,
Qt Creator dynamically loads a helper library in form of a DLL or a
shared object into the debugged process.
The \QSDK package already contains a prebuilt debugging helper
library. To create your own debugging helper library, select \gui{Tools} >
\gui{Options...} > \gui{Qt4} > \gui{Qt Versions}. As the internal data
structures of Qt can change between versions, the debugging helper
library is built for each Qt version.
\section1 Debugging Helpers Based on Python
Qt Creator uses GDB builds that enable Python scripting to display
information in the \gui {Locals and Watchers} view. When Python scripting
is used, code (Debugging helpers) does not need to be injected into the
debugged process to nicely display QStringList or \c std::map contents, for
example.
The code injection caused problems and put an extra stress on the debugged
process. You can now easily extend the debugging helpers to other types. No
compilation is required, just adding a few lines of Python.
Python scripting vastly reduces the communication overhead compared
with the previous solution. However, there are some obstacles:
\list
\o There is no Python-enabled GDB for Mac OS. Mac OS continues
injection with C++ based debugging helpers.
\o On the Symbian platform, an on-device debugging agent restricts the
communication between GDB and the device. Therefore, extracting
QObject properties, for example, is not possible.
\o There is no GDB to communicate with MSVC compiled applications on
Windows. So information can be displayed nicely only in a limited
fashion by using a cdb extension DLL.
\endlist
\section2 Extending the Python Based Debugging Helpers
On platforms featuring a Python-enabled version of the GDB debugger,
the data extraction is done by a Python script. This is more robust
as the script execution is separated from the debugged process. It
is also easier to extend as the script is less dependent on the
actual Qt version and does not need compilation.
To extend the shipped Python based debugging helpers for custom types,
define one Python function per user defined type in the
GDB startup file. By default, the following startup file is used:
\c{~/.gdbinit}. To use another file, select \gui {Tools > Options... >
Debugger > GDB}
and specify a filename in the \gui {GDB startup script} field.
The function name has to be qdump__NS__Foo, where NS::Foo is the class
or class template to be examined. Nested namespaces are possible.
The debugger plugin calls this function whenever you want to
display an object of this type. The function is passed the following
parameters:
\list
\o \c d of type \c Dumper
\o \c item of type \c Item
\endlist
The function has to feed the Dumper object with certain information
which is used to build up the object and its children's display in the
\gui{Locals and Watchers} view.
Example:
\code
def qdump__QVector(d, item):
d_ptr = item.value["d"]
p_ptr = item.value["p"]
alloc = d_ptr["alloc"]
size = d_ptr["size"]
check(0 <= size and size <= alloc and alloc <= 1000 * 1000 * 1000)
check(d_ptr["ref"]["_q_value"] > 0)
innerType = item.value.type.template_argument(0)
d.putItemCount(size)
d.putNumChild(size)
if d.isExpanded(item):
p = gdb.Value(p_ptr["array"]).cast(innerType.pointer())
with Children(d, [size, 2000], innerType)
for i in d.childRange():
d.putSubItem(Item(p.dereference(), item.iname, i))
p += 1
\endcode
\section2 Item Class
The Item Python class is a thin wrapper around values corresponding to one
line in the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view. The Item members are as follows :
\list
\o \gui{__init__(self, value, parentiname, iname, name = None)} - A
constructor. The object's internal name is created by concatenating
\c parentiname and \c iname. If \c None is passed as \c name, a
serial number is used.
\o \gui{value} - An object of type gdb.Value representing the value to
be displayed.
\o \gui{iname} - The internal name of the object, constituting a dot-separated
list of identifiers, corresponding to the position of the object's
representation in the view.
\o \gui{name} - An optional name. If given, is used in the
\gui{name} column of the view. If not, a simple number in brackets
is used instead.
\endlist
\section2 Dumper Class
For each line in the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view, a string like the
following needs to be created and channeled to the debugger plugin.
\code
"{iname='some internal name',
addr='object address in memory',
name='contents of the name column',
value='contents of the value column',
type='contents of the type column',
numchild='number of children', // zero/nonzero is sufficient
childtype='default type of children', // optional
childnumchild='default number of grandchildren', // optional
children=[ // only needed if item is expanded in view
{iname='internal name of first child',
... },
{iname='internal name of second child',
... },
...
]}"
\endcode
While in theory, you can build up the entire string above manually, it is
easier to employ the Dumper Python class for that purpose. The Dumper
Python class contains a complete framework to take care of the \c iname and
\c addr fields, to handle children of simple types, references, pointers,
enums, known and unknown structs as well as some convenience methods to
handle common situations.
The Dumper members are the following:
\list
\o \gui{__init__(self)} - Initializes the output to an empty string and
empties the child stack.
\o \gui{put(self, value)} - Low level method to directly append to the
output string.
\o \gui{putCommaIfNeeded(self)} - Appends a comma if the current output
ends in '}', '"' or ']' .
\o \gui{putField(self, name, value)} - Appends a comma if needed, and a
name='value' field.
\o \gui{beginItem(self, name)} - Starts writing a field by writing \c {name='}.
\o \gui{endItem(self)} - Ends writing a field by writing \c {'}.
\o \gui{endChildren(self)} - Ends writing a list of children.
\o \gui{childRange(self)} - Returns the range of children specified in
the current \c Children scope.
\o \gui{putItemCount(self, count)} - Appends a field \c {value='<%d items'}
to the output.
\o \gui{putEllipsis(self)} - Appends fields
\c {'{name="",value="",type="",numchild="0"}'}. This is
automatically done by \c endChildren if the number of children to
print is smaller than the number of actual children.
\o \gui{putName(self, name)} - Appends a \c {name='...'} field.
\o \gui{putType(self, type)} - Appends a field \c {type='...'} unless the
\a type coincides with the parent's default child type.
\o \gui{putNumChild(self, numchild)} - Appends a field \c {numchild='...'}
unless the \c numchild coincides with the parent's default child numchild
value.
\o \gui{putValue(self, value, encoding = None)} - Append a file \c {value='...'},
optionally followed by a field \c {valueencoding='...'}. The \c value
needs to be convertible to a string entirely consisting of
alphanumerical values. The \c encoding parameter can be used to
specify the encoding in case the real value had to be encoded in some
way to meet the alphanumerical-only requirement.
Currently the following encodings are supported:
\list
\o 0: unencoded 8 bit data, interpreted as Latin1.
\o 1: base64 encoded 8 bit data, used for QByteArray,
double quotes are added.
\o 2: base64 encoded 16 bit data, used for QString,
double quotes are added.
\o 3: base64 encoded 32 bit data,
double quotes are added.
\o 4: base64 encoded 16 bit data, without quotes (see 2)
\o 5: base64 encoded 8 bit data, without quotes (see 1)
\o 6: %02x encoded 8 bit data (as with \c QByteArray::toHex),
double quotes are added.
\o 7: %04x encoded 16 bit data (as with \c QByteArray::toHex),
double quotes are added.
\endlist
\o \gui{putStringValue(self, value)} - Encodes a QString and calls
\c putValue with the correct \c encoding setting.
\o \gui{putByteArrayValue(self, value)} - Encodes a QByteArray and calls
\c putValue with the correct \c encoding setting.
\o \gui{isExpanded(self, item)} - Checks whether the item with the
internal name \c item.iname is expanded in the view.
\o \gui{isExpandedIName(self, iname)} - Checks whether the item with the
internal name \c iname is expanded in the view.
\o \gui{putIntItem(self, name, value)} - Equivalent to:
\code
self.beginHash()
self.putName(name)
self.putValue(value)
self.putType("int")
self.putNumChild(0)
self.endHash()
\endcode
\o \gui{putBoolItem(self, name, value)} - Equivalent to:
\code
self.beginHash()
self.putName(name)
self.putValue(value)
self.putType("bool")
self.putNumChild(0)
self.endHash()
\endcode
\o \gui{pushOutput(self)} - Moves the output string to a safe location
from with it is sent to the debugger plugin even if further operations
raise an exception.
\o \gui{putCallItem(self, name, item, func)} -
Uses GDB to call the function \c func on the value specified by
\a {item.value} and output the resulting item. This function is
not available when debugging core dumps and it is not available
on the Symbian platform due to restrictions imposed by the on-device
debugging agent.
\o \gui{putItem(self, item)} - The "master function", handling
basic types, references, pointers and enums directly, iterates
over base classes and class members of compound types and calls
\c qdump__* functions whenever appropriate.
\o \gui{putSubItem(self, item)} - Equivalent to:
\code
with SubItem(self):
self.putItem(item)
\endcode
Exceptions raised by nested function calls are caught and all
output produced by \c putItem is replaced by the output of:
\code
...
except RuntimeError:
d.put('value="",type="",numchild="0",')
\endcode
\endlist
\section2 Children and SubItem Class
The attempt to create child items might lead to errors if data is
uninitialized or corrupted. To gracefully recover in such situations,
use \c Children and \c SubItem \e{Context Managers} to create the nested items.
The \c Children constructor \gui{__init__(self, dumper, numChild = 1,
childType = None, childNumChild = None)} uses one mandatory argument and three
optional arguments. The mandatory argument refers to the current \c Dumper
object. The optional arguments can be used to specify the number \c numChild
of children, with type \c childType_ and \c childNumChild_ grandchildren each.
If \c numChild_ is a list of two integers, the first one specifies the actual
number of children and the second the maximum number of children to print.
Similarly, using the \c SubItem class helps to protect individual items.
Example:
\code
d.putNumChild(2)
if d.isExpanded(item):
with Children(d):
with SubItem(d):
d.putName("key")
d.putItem(Item(key, item.iname, "key"))
with SubItem(d):
d.putName("value")
d.putItem(Item(value, item.iname, "value"))
\endcode
\section1 Debugging Helpers for QML
The debugging helpers for QML provide you with code completion for custom modules
(\c qmldump) and debugging Qt Quick UI projects (\c qmlobserver).
You have to build the QML Observer once for each Qt version that you want to debug
with. Select \gui{Tools > Options... > Qt4 > Qt Versions}.
\note QML Observer requires Qt 4.7.1 or later.
\section1 Enabling Debugging Helpers for Qt's Bootstrapped Applications
Qt's bootstrapped applications (such as moc and qmake) are built in a way
that is incompatible with the default build of the debugging helpers. To
work around this, add gdbmacros.cpp to the compiled sources in the
application Makefile.
Choose \gui {Tools > Options > Debugger > Debugging Helper > Use debugging
helper from custom location}, and specify an invalid location, such as
\c{/dev/null}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-project-wizards.html
\page creator-project-cmake.html
\nextpage creator-project-generic.html
\title Setting Up a CMake Project
CMake is an alternative to qmake for automating the generation of build
configurations.
It controls the software compilation process by using simple configuration
files, called CMakeLists.txt files. CMake generates native build
configurations and
workspaces that you can use in the compiler environment of your choice.
Since Qt Creator 1.1, CMake configuration files are supported.
Qt Creator 1.3 supports the Microsoft tool chain if the CMake version
is at least 2.8.
\section1 Setting the Path for CMake
You can set the path for the \c CMake executable in \gui{Tools} >
\gui{Options... > Projects > CMake}.
\image qtcreator-cmakeexecutable.png
\note Before you open a \c CMake project it is necessary to modify the
\c{PATH} environment variable to include the bin folders of \c mingw and
Qt Creator in the SDK.
For instance, if you have the Qt SDK installed in your C drive,
use the following command to set the environment variables in
the command line prompt:
\code
set PATH=C:\qtsdk\mingw\bin;C:\qtsdk\qt\bin;
\endcode
Then start Qt Creator by typing:
\code
C:\qtsdk\bin\qtcreator.exe
\endcode
\section1 Opening CMake Projects
To open a \c CMake project:
\list 1
\o Select \gui{File} > \gui{Open File or Project...}.
\o Select the \c{CMakeLists.txt} file from your \c CMake project.
\endlist
A wizard guides you through the rest of the process.
\note If the \c CMake project does not have an in-place build, Qt Creator
lets you specify the directory in which the project is built
(\l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow build}).
\image qtcreator-cmake-import-wizard1.png
The screenshot below shows how you can specify command line arguments to
\c CMake for your project.
\image qtcreator-cmake-import-wizard2.png
Normally, there is no need to pass any command line arguments for projects
that are already built, as \c CMake caches that information.
\section1 Building CMake Projects
Qt Creator builds \c CMake projects by running \c make, \c mingw32-make, or
\c nmake depending on your platform. The build errors and warnings are
parsed and displayed in the \gui{Build Issues} output pane.
By default, Qt Creator builds the \bold{all} target. You can specify which
targets to build in \gui{Project} mode, under \gui{Build Settings}.
\image qtcreator-cmake-build-settings.png
Qt Creator supports multiple build configurations. The build
directory can also be modified after the initial import.
\section1 Running CMake Projects
Qt Creator automatically adds \gui{Run Configurations} for all targets
specified in the \c CMake project file.
Known issues for the current version can be found
\l{Known Issues}{here}.
\section1 Adding External Libraries to CMake Projects
Through external libraries Qt Creator can support code completion and
syntax highlighting as if they were part of the current project or the Qt
library.
Qt Creator detects the external libraries using the \c FIND_PACKAGE()
macro. Some libraries come with the CMake installation. You can find those
in the \bold{Modules} directory of your CMake installation.
\note If you provide your own libraries, you also need to provide your own
\c FindFoo.cmake file. For more information, see
\l{http://vtk.org/Wiki/CMake_FAQ#Writing_FindXXX.cmake_files}{CMake FAQ}.
Syntax completion and highlighting work once your project successfully
builds and links against the external library.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debugging-helpers.html
\page creator-debugging-qml.html
\nextpage creator-analyzer.html
\title Debugging Qt Quick Projects
\note You need Qt 4.7.1 or later to debug Qt Quick projects.
\section1 Setting Up QML Debugging
The process of setting up debugging for Qt Quick projects depends on the type of
the project: Qt Quick UI or Qt Quick Application.
To debug Qt Quick UI projects:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Projects, and then select the \gui QML check box in the
\gui {Run Settings}, to enable QML debugging.
\o Compile the QML Observer debugging helper. For more information, see
\l{Debugging Helpers for QML}.
\endlist
To debug Qt Quick Applications:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Projects, and then select the \gui {Link QML debugging
library} check box in \gui {Build Steps}.
You might have to compile the library first, by selecting the
\gui Compile link.
\image qml-link-debugging-library.png "Build Steps"
\note Debugging requires opening a socket at a well-known port, which
presents a security risk. Anyone on the Internet could connect to the
application that you are debugging and execute any JavaScript
functions. Therefore, you must make sure that the port is properly
protected by a firewall.
\o In the \gui {Run Settings}, select the \gui QML check box to enable
QML debugging.
\o Select \gui {Build > Rebuild Project} to clean and rebuild the
project.
\endlist
\section1 Starting QML Debugging
To start the application, choose \gui {Debug > Start Debugging
> Start Debugging} or press \key F5. Once the application starts running, it behaves
and performs as usual. You can then perform the following tasks:
\list
\o Debug JavaScript functions
\o Preview QML changes at runtime
\o Inspect QML at runtime
\endlist
\section1 Debugging JavaScript Functions
You can use the Qt Creator \gui Debug mode to inspect the state of your
application while debugging. You can interact with the debugger in several
ways, as described in the following sections:
\list
\o \l{Setting Breakpoints}
\o \l{Viewing Call Stack Trace}
\o \l{Locals and Watchers}
\endlist
\section1 Executing JavaScript Expressions
When the application is interrupted by a breakpoint, you can use the \gui {QML
Script Console} to execute JavaScript expressions in the current context. To
open it, choose \gui {Window > View > QML Script Console}.
\image qml-script-console.png "QML Script Console view"
You can type JavaScript expressions and use them to get information about the
state or your application. For example, property values.
You can see the current value of a property by hovering over it in the code editor.
\section1 Previewing QML Changes at Runtime
If you change property values or add properties in the code editor, the changes
are updated in the running application when you save them. If live preview is not supported
for an element, a message appears. Click \gui Reload to preview the changes.
Reloading is enabled by default. To disable it, click
\inlineimage qml-observer-bar-reload.png "Apply Changes on Save button"
on the toolbar.
\section1 Inspecting QML at Runtime
While the application is running, you can use the \gui {QML Observer} view to
explore the object structure, debug animations, and inspect colors.
To open the \gui {QML Observer} view, choose \gui {Window > View > QML Observer}.
The view shows the properties of the currently selected QML element.
\image qml-observer-view.png "QML Observer view"
When you debug complex applications, you can use the observe
mode to jump to the position in code where an element is defined. To switch to
the observe mode, click
\inlineimage qml-observer-bar-observe.png
on the toolbar.
Click elements in the running application to jump to their definitions in the code.
Double-click elements to browse the element hierarchy. The hierarchy is displayed
as bread crumbs in the \gui {QML Observer} view.
To move the application running in \QQV to the front, select the
\gui {Show Application on Top} button.
You can also right-click an element in the running application to view the element
hierarchy as a context menu. Select an element to jump to its definition in code.
\image qml-observer-context-menu.png "QML Observer"
To zoom in and out of the application, click the \gui Zoom button.
To inspect colors, click the \gui {Color Picker} button. You can also click
\inlineimage qml-observer-bar-copy-color.png "Copy Color button"
to copy the color definition to the clipboard.
\section1 Debugging Animations
\image qml-observer.png
To play and pause animations in the running application, select the
\gui {Play/Pause Animations} button on the toolbar or \gui {Debugging >
Animations > Pause}, or press
\key {Ctrl+.}.
To change the speed at which animations are played, select a value in \gui {Debugging
> Animations} or click and hold down the \gui {Play/Pause Animations}
button to select a value.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-project-cmake.html
\page creator-project-generic.html
\nextpage creator-version-control.html
\title Setting Up a Generic Project
Qt Creator supports generic projects, so you can import existing projects
that do not use qmake or CMake and Qt Creator ignores your build system.
Generic project support allows you to use Qt Creator as a code editor. You
can change the way your project is built by modifying the \c make command
in the \gui{Projects} mode under \gui{Build Settings}.
When you import a project, Qt Creator creates the following files that
allow you to specify which files belong to your project and which include
directories or defines you want to pass to your compile:
\tt{.files}, \tt{.includes}, and \tt{.config}.
\section1 Importing a Generic Project
To import an existing generic project:
\list 1
\o Select \gui File > \gui{New File or Project...} >
\gui{Other Project} > \gui{Import Existing Project}.
\o In \gui{Import Existing Project}, enter the project name
and select the location of the project file you want to import.
Qt Creator automatically generates the following files in the
project directory:
\list
\o \l{Specifying Files}{.files}
\o \l{Specifying Include Paths}{.includes}
\o \l{Specifying Defines}{.config}
\o .creator
\endlist
\endlist
When the project is successfully imported, Qt Creator creates the project
tree in the sidebar.
After importing a generic project into Qt Creator, open it by selecting the
\tt{.creator} file.
\section1 Working with Generic Project Files
For a generic project, you have to manually specify which files belong to
your project and which include directories or defines you want to pass to
your compiler.
\section1 Specifying Files
The list of files for a generic project is specified in the \tt{.files}
file. When you first create a generic project, Qt Creator adds any
files it recognizes to your project.
To add or remove files, edit the \tt{.files} file in Qt Creator.
Qt Creator recreates your project tree when you save the \tt{.files} file.
Alternatively, you can add and remove files using the context menu in the
project tree.
If you frequently need to update the \tt{.files} file, you can do so
efficiently by using a script that updates the file for you. If the file
is modified externally, you have to restart Qt Creator for the changes to
take effect.
To update the \tt{.files} on the \gui Git repository use the following
script:
\code
git ls-files "*.cpp" "*.h" > MyProject.files
\endcode
\section1 Specifying Include Paths
The include paths are specified in the \tt{.includes} file, one include
path per line. The paths can be either absolute or relative to the
\tt{.includes} file.
\section1 Specifying Defines
The defines are specified in the \tt{.config} file. The \tt{.config} file is
a regular C++ file, prepended to all your source files when they are parsed.
Only use the \tt{.config} file to add lines as in the example below:
\code
#define NAME value
\endcode
\section1 Creating a Run Configuration
Qt Creator cannot automatically determine which executable to run.
In the \gui{Projects} mode under \gui{Run Settings}, define the executable
file to run:
\list 1
\o Click \gui Add and select \gui{Custom Executable}.
\o Define the configuration name, the location of the executable, any
additional arguments and the working directory.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-design-mode.html
\page creator-visual-editor.html
\nextpage quick-projects.html
\title Developing Qt Quick Applications
You can either create Qt Quick projects from scratch or import existing projects to
Qt Creator.
You can use the code editor (\l{Using the Editor}{Edit mode}) or the visual editor
(\l{Using Qt Quick Designer}{Design mode}) to develop Qt Quick applications.
\image qtcreator-qt-quick-editors.png "Edit mode and Design mode"
The following sections describe typical tasks you can do with Qt Creator.
\list
\o \l {Creating Qt Quick Projects}
\o \l {Using Qt Quick Designer}
\o \l {Creating Components}
\o \l {Creating Buttons}
\o \l {Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders}
\o \l {Creating Screens}
\o \l {Animating Screens}
\o \l {Adding User Interaction Methods}
\o \l {Exporting Designs from Graphics Software}
\o \l {Implementing Application Logic}
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-visual-editor.html
\page quick-projects.html
\nextpage creator-using-qt-quick-designer.html
\title Creating Qt Quick Projects
\image qmldesigner-new-project.png "New File or Project dialog"
When you create a new Qt Quick project from scratch, you have the following options:
\list
\o \gui {Qt Quick Application} creates a Qt Quick application project that can
contain both QML and C++ code. The project includes a QDeclarativeView. You can build
the application and deploy it on desktop and mobile target platforms. For example, you
can create signed Symbian Installation System (SIS) packages for this type of projects.
\o \gui {Qt Quick UI} creates a Qt Quick UI project with a single QML file that
contains the main view. You can review Qt Quick UI projects in the QML Viewer and you
need not build them. You do not need to have the development environment installed on your
computer to create and run this type of projects.
\o \gui {Custom QML Extension Plugin} creates a C++ plugin that makes it possible
to offer extensions that can be loaded dynamically into applications by using the
QDeclarativeEngine class.
\endlist
If you have existing QML applications that you want to run in Qt Creator or deploy
to mobile devices, use the \gui {Qt Quick Application} wizard to convert them
to Qt Quick applications.
\section1 Creating Qt Quick UI Projects
\list 1
\o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt Quick UI
> Choose...}.
The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
\image qmldesigner-new-ui-project-location.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
\o In the \gui Name field, give a name to the project.
Do not use spaces and special characters in the project name and path.
\o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
\c {C:\Qt\examples}. To select the path from a directory tree, click \gui Browse.
\o Click \gui{Next}.
\image qmldesigner-new-ui-project-summary.png "Project Management dialog"
\o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
\endlist
Qt Creator creates the following files:
\list
\o .qmlproject project file defines that all QML, JavaScript, and image
files in the project folder belong to the project. Therefore, you do not
need to individually list all the files in the project.
\o .qml file defines an element, such as a component, screen, or the whole
application UI.
\endlist
The \c import statement in the beginning of the .qml file specifies the
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativemodules.html} {Qt modules}
to import. Each Qt module contains a set of default elements.
Specify a version to get the features you want.
To use JavaScript and image files in the application, copy them to the
project folder.
\section1 Creating Qt Quick Applications
\list 1
\o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt Quick Application
> Choose...}.
The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
\image qmldesigner-new-project-location.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
\o In the \gui Name field, give a name to the project.
Do not use spaces and special characters in the project name and path.
\o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
\c {C:\Qt\examples}. To select the path from a directory tree, click \gui Browse.
\o Click \gui{Next}.
The \gui {Target Setup} dialog opens.
\image qmldesigner-new-project-qt-versions.png "Target Setup dialog"
\o Select the Qt versions to use as build targets for your project,
and then click \gui{Next}.
\note Qt Quick is supported since Qt 4.7, and therefore, only Qt 4.7 and later
versions are displayed. Further, if you have only one supported Qt version installed,
this dialog is skipped.
The \gui {Mobile Options} dialog opens.
\image qmldesigner-new-app-project-mobile-options.png "Mobile Options dialog"
\o In the \gui {Orientation behavior} field, determine how the application
behaves when the orientation of the device display rotates between portrait
and landscape, and then click \gui Next.
\note This dialog opens only if you select \gui Maemo5 or
\gui {Symbian Device} target in the \gui {Target Setup} dialog.
The \gui {Symbian Specific} dialog opens.
\image qmldesigner-new-project-symbian-options.png "Symbian Specific dialog"
\o In the \gui {Application icon (.svg)} field, select an application
icon for the \gui {Symbian Device} target, or use the default icon.
\o In the \gui {Target UID3} field, specify the \l{Application UID}, or
use the default UID.
\note Qt Creator generates a UID for testing the application on a device.
You need to change the UID when you deliver the application for public
use.
\o Click \gui Next.
The \gui {Maemo Specific} dialog opens.
\image qmldesigner-new-project-maemo-options.png "Maemo Specific dialog"
\o In the \gui {Application icon (64x64)} field, select the application
icon to use on Maemo targets, or use the default icon.
The \gui {QML Sources} dialog opens.
\image qmldesigner-new-project-qml-sources.png "QML Sources" dialog
\o In the \gui {QML Main File} group, select \gui {Generate a .qml file},
and then click \gui{Next}.
The \gui {Project Management} dialog opens.
\image qmldesigner-new-project-summary.png "Project Management" dialog
\o In the \gui {Add to project} field, you can add this project to another
project as a subproject.
\o In the \gui {Add to version control} field, you can add the project to
a version control system.
\o Click \gui Finish to create the project.
\endlist
Qt Creator creates the necessary boilerplate files. Some of the files are
specific to the Symbian or Maemo platform.
\section1 Importing QML Applications
If you have existing QML applications that you want to run in Qt Creator or deploy
to mobile devices, use the \gui {Qt Quick Application} wizard and select the main
.qml file in your project. All the other files in the project are automatically added
to the application project.
To import QML applications:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt Quick Application
> Choose...}.
\o Name the project and set its path, and then click \gui Next.
\o Select the Qt versions to use as build targets for your project, and click
\gui{Next}.
\o Specify options for deploying the application to mobile device targets, and
click \gui{Next}.
\o In the \gui {QML Sources} dialog, select the \gui {Import an existing .qml file}
option and specify the main .qml file of the project you want to import.
\image qmldesigner-import-project.png "QML Sources" dialog
\o Click \gui Next.
\o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
\endlist
Qt Creator adds references to the QML files to a project and creates the additional files
necessary for deploying applications to mobile devices.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-using-qt-quick-designer.html
\page quick-components.html
\nextpage quick-buttons.html
\title Creating Components
A QML component provides a way of defining a new type that you can re-use in other QML
files. A component is like a black box; it interacts with the outside world
through properties, signals, and slots, and is generally defined in its own QML file.
You can import components to screens and applications.
You can use the following QML elements to create components:
\list
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
uses an image as a border or background.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-image.html}{Image}
adds a bitmap to the scene. You can stretch and tile images.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-item.html}{Item}
is the most basic of all visual items in QML. Even though it has no visual appearance,
it defines all the properties that are common across visual items, such as the x and
y position, width and height, anchoring, and key handling.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-rectangle.html}{Rectangle}
adds a rectangle that is painted with a solid fill color and an optional border.
You can also use the radius property to create rounded rectangles.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-text.html}{Text}
adds formatted read-only text.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-textedit.html}{Text Edit}
adds a single line of editable formatted text that can be validated.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-textinput.html}{Text Input}
adds a single line of editable plain text that can be validated.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-webview.html}{Web View}
adds web content to a canvas.
\endlist
You can experiment with a set of Qt Quick components that are designed to
appear native to the Symbian devices target platform. For more information,
see
\l{http://labs.qt.nokia.com/2011/04/08/qt-quick-components-for-symbian-technology-preview/}{Qt Quick components for Symbian Technology Preview}.
You can dowload a set of commonly used UI-components for generic use in
Qt Quick projects from
\l{https://projects.forum.nokia.com/QMLTemplates}{QML Templates}. You can
open and edit the templates in \QD.
\section1 Creating Components in Qt Quick Designer
\list 1
\o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Files and Classes > QML
> Choose...} to create a new .qml file.
\note Components are listed in the \gui {QML Components} section of the
\gui Library pane only if the filename begins with a capital letter.
\o Click \gui Design to open the .qml file in \QMLD.
\o Drag and drop an item from the \gui Library pane to the editor.
\o Edit item properties in the \gui Properties pane.
The available properties depend on the item.
\endlist
The following sections contain examples of how to create some common components:
\list
\o \l{Creating Buttons}
\o \l{Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders}
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage quick-components.html
\page quick-buttons.html
\nextpage quick-scalable-image.html
\title Creating Buttons
To create a button component:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > QML > QML File > Choose...} to
create a QML file called Button.qml (for example).
\note Components are listed in the \gui Library pane only if the filename
begins with a capital letter.
\o Click \gui {Design} to edit the file in the visual editor.
\o In the \gui Navigator pane, click \gui Rectangle to set properties
for it.
\o In the \gui Properties pane, modify the appearance of the button.
\list a
\o In the \gui Size field, set the width (\gui W) and height (\gui H)
of the button.
\o In the \gui Color field, select the button color.
\o In the \gui Radius field, use the slider to set the radius of the
rectangle and produce rounded corners for the button.
\endlist
\o Drag and drop a \gui {Text} item on top of the \gui Rectangle. This
creates a nested element where \gui Rectangle is the parent element of
\gui Text. Elements are positioned relative to their parents.
\o In the \gui Properties pane, edit the properties of the \gui Text item.
\list a
\o In the \gui Text field, type \bold Button.
You can select the text color, font, size, and style in the \gui Font
section.
\o In the \gui Alignment field, select the center buttons to align
the text to the center of the button.
\o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
button to anchor the text to the whole button area.
\endlist
\o Press \key {Ctrl+S} to save the button.
\image qmldesigner-button.png "Button component"
\endlist
\note To view the button, you must add it to a Qt Quick Application or Qt Quick UI
project.
To create a graphical button that scales beautifully without using vector graphics,
use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
element. For more information, see \l{Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage quick-buttons.html
\page quick-scalable-image.html
\nextpage quick-screens.html
\title Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders
You can use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
element to display an image, such as a PNG file, as a border and a background.
Use two Border Image elements and suitable graphics to make it look like the button
is pushed down when it is clicked. One of the Border Image elements is visible by default.
You can specify that it is hidden and the other one becomes visible when the mouse
is clicked.
Add a MouseArea that covers the whole area and emits the clicked signal (\c {parent.clicked()})
when it detects a mouse click.
You can add text to the button and set it up as a property. The text can then be initialized
from the outside, making the button a reusable UI component. The font size is also available
in case the default size is too big. You can scale down the button text and use smooth text
rendering for some extra quality.
\image qmldesigner-borderimage.png "Graphical button"
To create a graphical button:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > QML > QML File > Choose...} to create
a QML file called Button.qml (for example).
\o Double-click the file to open it in the code editor.
\o Replace the \gui Rectangle with an \gui Item, as illustrated by the
following code snippet:
\qml
Item {
}
\endqml
\o Specify properties and set expressions for the \gui Item, as
illustrated by the following code snippet:
\snippet snippets/qml/quick-scalable-image.qml properties and signal definitions
You will point to the properties and expression later.
\o Click \gui {Design} to edit the file in the visual editor.
\o Drag and drop two \gui BorderImage items from the \gui Library pane to
the scene.
\o Drag and drop a \gui Text item to the scene.
\o Drag and drop a \gui MouseArea to the screen.
\o In the \gui Navigator pane, select \gui border_image1 to specify
settings for it in the \gui Properties pane:
\list a
\o Select \gui {Set Expression} in the menu next to the \gui Visibility
check box.
\o Enter the following expression to specify that the image is visible
when the mouse is not pressed down: \c {!mouse_area1.pressed}.
\o In the \gui Source field, select the image file for the
button, for example button_up.png.
\o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
button to anchor the border image to the \gui Item.
\endlist
\o Select \gui border_image2 to specify similar settings for it:
\list a
\o Set the following epression for \gui Visibility, to specify that
the image is visible when the mouse is pressed down:
\c {mouse_area1.pressed}.
\o In the \gui Source field, select the image file for the
button when it is clicked, for example button_down.png.
\o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
button to anchor the border image to the \gui Item.
\endlist
\o Select \gui text1 to specify font size and color, and text
scaling and rendering:
\list a
\o In the \gui Color field, use the color picker to select
the font color, or enter a value in the field.
\o In the \gui Text field, select \gui {Set Expression} and
enter a pointer to the \c {text} property that you specified
earlier: \c {parent.txt}.
\o Select the \gui Aliasing check box to enable smooth text
rendering.
\o In the \gui Size field, select \gui {Pixels} to specify
the font size in pixels. By default, the size is specified in
points.
\o In the \gui Size field, select \gui {Set Expression} and
enter a pointer to the \c {fontSize} property that you specified
earlier.
\o Click \gui {Layout}, and then click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-center-in.png "Anchor buttons"
buttons to inherit the vertical and horizontal centering from
the parent.
\o Click \gui Advanced to specify scaling for the text in the
\gui Scale field.
\o Select \gui {Set Expression} and enter the following expression:
\c {if (!mousearea1.pressed) { 1 } else { 0.95 }}.
\note You can enter long and complicated expressions also in the
code editor.
\endlist
\o In the code editor, add to the \c MouseArea item
a pointer to the \c clicked expression that you added earlier:
\c {onClicked: parent.clicked()}.
\endlist
\note To view the button, you must add it to a Qt Quick Application or Qt
Quick UI project.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage quick-scalable-image.html
\page quick-screens.html
\nextpage quick-animations.html
\title Creating Screens
You can use predefined QML elements and your own components to create screens.
Typically, the main qml file in a Qt Quick project specifies the main window of an
application.
The QML files in the project folder are displayed in \gui {QML Components} in the
\gui Library pane.
You can dowload QML templates that specify different types of screens from
\l{https://projects.forum.nokia.com/QMLTemplates}{QML Templates} for use in
your Qt Quick projects. You can open and edit the templates in \QD.
\section1 Adding Components to Screens
\list 1
\o Drag and drop components from the \gui Library pane to the editor.
\o Select components in the \gui Navigator pane to edit their properties
in the \gui Properties pane.
For example, you can anchor components to a position on the screen.
\endlist
\section1 Using Data Models
You can create the following types of views to organize items provided by
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativemodels.html}{data models}:
\list
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-gridview.html}{Grid View}
provides a grid vizualization of a model.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-listview.html}{List View}
provides a list vizualization of a model.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-pathview.html}{Path View}
visualizes the contents of a model along a path.
\endlist
In the code editor, write the code to use the data models.
\section1 Positioning Items on Screens
You can use the following items to arrange items on screens:
\list
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-column.html}{Column}
arranges its child items vertically.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-row.html}{Row}
arranges its child items horizontally.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-grid.html}{Grid}
arranges its child items so that they are aligned in a grid and
are not overlapping.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-flow.html}{Flow}
arranges its child items side by side, wrapping as necessary.
\endlist
\section1 Using States
Use states and transitions
to navigate between screens.
QML states typically describe user interface configurations, such as the UI elements,
their properties and behavior and the available actions. For example, you can use
states to create two screens.
To add states, click the empty slot in the \gui States pane. Then modify the new state
in the visual editor.
\image qmldesigner-states.png "States pane"
The properties that you change in a state are highlighted with blue color.
In the code editor, you can see the changes recorded as changes to the base state.
To keep the QML code clean, you should create a base state that contains all the
elements you will need in the application. You can then create states, in
which you hide and show a set of items and modify their properties.
This allows you to:
\list
\o Align items on different screens with each other.
\o Avoid excessive property changes. If an item is invisible in the base
state, you must define all changes to its child elements as property changes,
which leads to complicated QML code.
\o Minimize the differences between the base state and the other states
to keep the QML code short and readable and to improve performance.
\o Avoid problems when using transitions and animation when changing
states.
\endlist
To create screens for an application by using states:
\list 1
\o In the base state, add all elements you will need in the application.
While you work on one screen, you can click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-show-hide-icon.png
icon to hide elements on the canvas that are not part of a screen.
\o In the \gui States pane, click the empty slot to create a new state
and give it a name. For example, \c Normal.
\o In the \gui Properties pane, deselect the \gui Visibility check box
or set \gui Opacity to 0 for each element that is not needed in this view.
If you specify the setting for the parent element, all child elements
inherit it and are also hidden.
\image qmldesigner-screen-design.png "Designing screens"
\o Create additional states for each screen and set the visibility or
opacity of the elements in the screen.
\o To determine which view opens when the application starts, use the code
editor to set the state of the root item of the .qml file, as specified by the
following code snippet:
\qml
Item {
state: "Normal"
}
\endqml
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage quick-screens.html
\page quick-animations.html
\nextpage quick-user-interaction.html
\title Animating Screens
To make movement between states smooth, you can specify transitions.
You can use different types of animated transitions. For example, you can animate changes
to property values and colors. You can use rotation animation to control the direction of
rotation. For more information, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativeanimation.html}{QML Animation}.
You can use the \c ParallelAnimation element to start several animations at the same time.
Or use the \c SequentialAnimation element to run them one after another.
You can use the code editor to specify transitions. For more information, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-transition.html}{QML Transition Element}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage quick-animations.html
\page quick-user-interaction.html
\nextpage quick-export-to-qml.html
\title Adding User Interaction Methods
You can add the following basic interaction methods to scenes:
\list
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-flickable.html}{Flickable}
items can be flicked horizontally or vertically.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-flipable.html}{Flipable}
items can be flipped between their front and back sides by using rotation,
state, and transition.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-focusscope.html}{Focus Scope}
assists in keyboard focus handling when building reusable QML components.
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-mousearea.html}{Mouse Area}
enables simple mouse handling.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage quick-user-interaction.html
\page quick-export-to-qml.html
\nextpage quick-application-logic.html
\title Exporting Designs from Graphics Software
You can export designs from graphics software, such as Adobe Photoshop and GIMP,
to QML files. Each scene is converted into a single QML file with an Image or a
Text element for each layer and saved on the development PC. Top-level layer
groups are converted into merged QML Image elements.
Note: GIMP does not support grouping, and therefore, each layer is exported as
an item in GIMP.
The following rules apply to the conversions:
\list
\o Layer names are used as element names. Spaces and hash marks (#) are
replaced with underscore characters to create valid ids for the elements.
\o Layer styles, such as drop shadows, are converted to images.
\o Offset, size, ordering and opacity are preserved.
\o Text layers are converted to Text elements, unless you specify that they
be converted to Image elements.
\o Hidden layers can be exported, and their visibility is set to hidden.
\o PNG images are copied to the images subirectory.
\endlist
You can open the QML file in Qt Creator for editing. If you edit the file in Adobe
Photoshop and export it to the same directory again, any changes you made in Qt
Creator are overwritten. However, you can re-export graphical assets without
recreating the QML code.
If you create vector graphics with other tools that have an Adobe Photoshop export
option,such as Adobe Illustrator, you can export them first to Photoshop and then
to QML.
\section1 Exporting from Adobe Photoshop to QML
\image qml-export-photoshop.png
The script has been tested to work on Adobe Photoshop CS 4 and 5, but it might also
work on other versions.
\list 1
\o Download the export script, \e{Export QML.jx}, from
\l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-labs/photoshop-qmlexporter/trees/master}{Gitorious}.
\note Read the README.txt file in the repository for latest information about
the script.
\o Double-click the export script to add the export command to the \gui Scripts
menu. You can also copy the script file to the Adobe Photoshop scripts directory
(typically, \c{\Presets\Scripts} in the Photoshop installation directory).
\o In Adobe Photoshop, choose \gui {File > Scripts > Export to QML} to export the
scene to a QML file.
\o In the \gui {Export Document to QML} dialog, enter a name and location for the
QML file.
\o Select the \gui {Rasterize text} check box to export text layers as images,
not as Text elements.
\o Select the \gui {Group layers} check box to export each top-level group as a
merged QML Image element.
\o Select the \gui {Export hidden} check box to export hidden layers and to set
their visibility property to hidden.
\o Deselect the \gui {Export QML} check box if you have modified the QML document
in Qt Creator, but still want to re-export graphical assets.
\o Click \gui Export.
\endlist
The QML file is saved to the location that you specified.
In Qt Creator, choose \gui {File > Open File or Project} to open the QML file.
\note Existing files are replaced without warning.
\section1 Exporting from GIMP to QML
\image qml-export-gimp.png
The script has been tested to work on GIMP 2. You can download GIMP 2 from
\l{http://www.gimp.org/downloads/}{GIMP Downloads}.
To use the export script on Microsoft Windows, you also need to install the
GIMP Python extension (Python, PyCairo, PyGobject, PyGTK). However, GIMP is
not officially supported on Windows, so we cannot guarantee that this will
work.
\list 1
\o On Microsoft Windows, you must first add Python support to your GIMP
installation, as instructed in
\l {http://www.gimpusers.com/tutorials/install-python-for-gimp-2-6-windows}{Tutorial: Installing Python for GIMP 2.6 (Windows)}.
\o Download the export script, \e qmlexporter.py, from
\l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-labs/gimp-qmlexporter/trees/master}{Gitorious}.
\note Read the INSTALL.txt in the repository for latest information about the
script.
\o Copy the export script to the plug-ins directory in the GIMP installation
directory.
\o Check the properties of the file to make sure that it is executable.
On Linux, run the following command: \c {chmod u+rx}
\o Restart GIMP to have the export command added to the \gui File menu.
\o Choose \gui {File > Export to QML} to export the design to a QML file.
\o In the \gui {Export Layers to a QML Document} dialog, enter a name and
location for the QML file, and click \gui Export.
\endlist
The QML file is saved to the location that you specified.
In Qt Creator, choose \gui {File > Open File or Project} to open the QML file.
\note Existing files are replaced without warning.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage quick-export-to-qml.html
\page quick-application-logic.html
\nextpage creator-using-qt-designer.html
\title Implementing Application Logic
A user interface is only a part of an application, and not really useful by itself.
You can use Qt or JavaScript to implement the application logic. For more information on
using JavaScript, see
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qdeclarativejavascript.html} {Integrating JavaScript}.
For an example of how to use JavaScript to develop a game, see the
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-advtutorial.html} {QML Advanced Tutorial}.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-refactoring.html
\page qt-quick-toolbars.html
\nextpage creator-editor-locator.html
\title Using Qt Quick Toolbars
When you edit QML code in the code editor, you specify the properties
of QML components. For some properties, such as colors and font names,
this is not a trivial task. For example, few people can visualize the
color #18793f.
To easily edit these properties, you can use the Qt Quick Toolbars.
When you select a component in the code and a toolbar is available,
a light bulb icon appears:
\inlineimage qml-toolbar-indicator.png
. Select the icon to open the toolbar.
To open toolbars immediately when you select a component, select
\gui{Tools > Options... > Qt Quick > Qt Quick Toolbar > Always show Quick
Toolbar}.
Drag the toolbar to pin it to another location. Select
\inlineimage qml-toolbar-pin.png
to unpin the toolbar and move it to its default location. To pin toolbars
by default, select \gui{Tools > Options... > Qt Quick > Qt Quick Toolbar
> Pin Quick Toolbar}.
\section1 Previewing Images
The Qt Quick Toolbar for images allows you to edit the properties of
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/latest/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
and \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/latest/qml-image.html}{Image} components.
You can scale and tile the images, replace them with other images,
preview them, and change the image margins.
\image qml-toolbar-image.png "Qt Quick Toolbar for images"
To preview an image, double-click it on the toolbar. In the preview
dialog, you can zoom the image. Drag the image margins to change them.
\image qml-toolbar-image-preview.png "Image preview dialog"
\section1 Formatting Text
The Qt Quick Toolbar for text allows you to edit the properties of
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/latest/qml-text.html}{Text} components.
You can change the font family and size as well as text formatting, style,
alignment, and color.
If a property is assigned an expression instead of a value, you
cannot use the toolbar to edit it. The button for editing the property
is disabled.
\image qml-toolbar-text.png "Qt Quick Toolbar for text"
By default, font size is specified as pixels. To use points, instead,
change \gui px to \gui pt in the size field.
\section1 Previewing Animation
The Qt Quick Toolbar for animation allows you to edit the properties of
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-propertyanimation.html}{PropertyAnimation}
components and the components that inherit it. You can change the easing curve
type and duration. For some curves, you can also specify amplitude, period,
and overshoot values.
\image qml-toolbar-animation.png "Qt Quick Toolbar for animation"
Select the play button to preview your changes.
\section1 Editing Rectangles
The Qt Quick Toolbar for rectangles allows you to edit the properties of
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/qml-rectangle.html}{Rectangle}
components. You can change the fill and border colors and add
gradients.
\image qml-toolbar-rectangle.png "Qt Quick Toolbar for rectangles"
To add gradient stop points, click above the gradient bar. To remove
stop points, drag them upwards.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-external.html
\page creator-maemo-emulator.html
\nextpage creator-mime-types.html
\title Using the Maemo Emulator
The Maemo 5 emulator emulates the Nokia N900 device environment. You can test
applications in conditions practically identical to running the application
on a Nokia N900 device with software update release 1.3 (V20.2010.36-2).
You can test user interaction by using the keypad and
touch emulation.
To test the application UI, user interaction with the application, and
functionality that uses the mobility APIs, use the Qt Simulator,
instead. For more information, see the
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qtsimulator/index.html}{Qt Simulator Manual}.
The Maemo 5 emulator is installed and configured as part of the \QSDK
package. You can also install and configure the MADDE environment and
Maemo emulator separately. For more information, see
\l{Connecting Maemo Devices}.
\section1 Starting the Maemo Emulator
The \gui {Start Maemo Emulator} button is visible if you have a project
open in Qt Creator for which you have added the Maemo build target.
To start the Maemo emulator, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-maemo-emulator-button.png "Start Maemo Emulator button"
.
Test your application on the Maemo emulator as on a device. For a list of
keyboard shortcuts that you can use to emulate Nokia N900 keys and functions, see
\l {Emulating Nokia N900 Keys}.
\section1 Rendering Graphics
The Maemo emulator supports OpenGL to improve graphics rendering. Hardware
acceleration produces better results than software rendering. By default,
Qt Creator automatically detects, whether hardware acceleration is
supported on the development PC and tries to use it. However, sometimes
the results of the automatic detection are not reliable, and
hardware acceleration might be selected even if it is actually not
available on the development PC. This causes the emulator to crash.
If the Maemo emulator crashes, you are asked whether you want to try
software rendering, instead.
To specify the OpenGL mode, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Maemo > Qemu
Settings}.
\section1 Emulating Nokia N900 Keys
The following table summarizes the keyboard shortcuts that you can use
to emulate Nokia N900 keys and functions.
\table
\header
\o Nokia N900 Key
\o Keyboard Shortcut
\row
\o \list
\o Alphabet keys
\o Comma (,)
\o Period (.)
\o Space
\o Arrow keys
\o Enter
\o Backspace
\endlist
\o Respective keys on the development PC keyboard.
\row
\o Shift
\o Left Shift key
\row
\o Ctrl
\o Left Ctrl key
\row
\o Mode
\o Left Alt key
\row
\o Power
\o Esc
\row
\o Keypad slider open and close
\o F1
\row
\o Keypad lock
\o F2
\row
\o Camera lens open and close
\o F3
\row
\o Camera focus
\o F4
\row
\o Camera take picture
\o F5
\note The actual camera functionality is not emulated.
\row
\o Stereo headphones connect and disconnect
\o F6
\row
\o Volume down
\o F7
\row
\o Volume up
\o F8
\row
\o Accelerometer x axis, negative
\o 1
\row
\o Accelerometer x axis, positive
\o 2
\row
\o Accelerometer z axis, negative
\o 4
\row
\o Accelerometer z axis, positive
\o 5
\row
\o Accelerometer y axis, negative
\o 7
\row
\o Accelerometer y axis, positive
\o 8
\endtable
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-version-control.html
\page adding-plugins.html
\nextpage creator-editor-external.html
\title Adding Qt Designer Plugins
You can use Qt APIs to create plugins that extend Qt applications.
This allows you to add your own widgets to \QD.
The most flexible way to include a plugin with an application is to compile it
into a dynamic library that is shipped separately, and detected and loaded at runtime.
The applications can detect plugins that are stored in the standard plugin
subdirectories. For more information on how to create and locate plugins and to
change the default plugin path, see \l{How to Create Qt Plugins}.
For more information about how to create plugins for \QD, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/designer-using-custom-widgets.html}{Creating and Using Components for Qt Designer}.
\section1 Locating Qt Designer Plugins
\QD fetches plugins from the standard locations and loads the plugins
that match its build key. \QD is delivered both as a standalone application
and as part of the SDK, where it is integrated into Qt Creator.
The correct folder to place the plugins depends on
which one you use.
The integrated \QD fetches plugins from the \c {%SDK%\bin\designer} folder on Windows
and Linux. For information about how to configure plugins on Mac OS, see
\l{Configuring Qt Designer Plugins on Mac OS}.
To check which plugins
were loaded successfully and which failed, choose \gui{Tools > Form Editor >
About Qt Designer Plugins}.
The standalone \QD is part of the Qt library used for building projects,
located under \c {%SDK%\qt}. Therefore, it fetches plugins from the following folder:
\c {%SDK%\qt\plugins\designer}. To check which plugins were loaded successfully and which
failed, choose \gui{Help > About Plugins}.
\section2 Configuring Qt Designer Plugins on Mac OS
On the Mac, a GUI application must be built and run from a bundle. A bundle is a
directory structure that appears as a single entity when viewed in the Finder.
A bundle for an application typcially contains the executable and all the resources
it needs.
Qt Creator uses its own set of Qt Libraries located in the bundle, and therefore,
you need to configure the \QD plugins that you want to use with Qt Creator.
Fore more information about how to deploy applications on Mac OS, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7/deployment-mac.html}{Deploying an Application on Mac OS X}.
The following example illustrates how to configure version 5.2.1 of the
\l{http://qwt.sourceforge.net/}{Qwt - Qt Widgets for Technical Applications} library
for use with Qt Creator:
\list 1
\o To check the paths used in the Qwt library, enter the following \c otool command:
\snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 0
The output for Qwt 5.2.1 indicates that the plugin uses Qt core libraries (QtDesigner,
QtScript, QtXml, QtGui and QtCore) and libqwt.5.dylib:
\snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 1
\o You must copy the \QD plugin and the Qwt library files to the following locations:
\list
\o \c {libqwt_designer_plugin.dylib} to \c {QtCreator.app/Contents/MacOS/designer}
\o \c {libqwt.*.dylib} to \c {QtCreator.app/Contents/Frameworks}
\endlist
Enter the following commands:
\snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 4
\o Enter the following \c otool command to check the libraries that are used by the
Qwt library:
\snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 2
The command returns the following output:
\snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 3
\o Enter the following \c install_name_tool command to fix the references of the
libraries:
\snippet examples/doc_src_plugins.qdoc 5
\endlist
\section1 Matching Build Keys
The Qt Creator that is included in pre-built SDK packages on Windows is built with the
Microsoft Visual Studio compiler, whereas the version of Qt shipped for building applications
is configured and built to use the MinGW/g++ compiler. Plugins built by using this version of
Qt cannot be loaded by Qt Creator because the build-keys do not match. The plugins can only be
used in the standalone version of \QD. Choose \gui{Help > About Qt Creator} to check
the Qt version Qt Creator was built with.
To use \QD plugins that were built for the shipped Qt version, make sure that
Qt Creator is built with the same compiler by either recompiling Qt Creator using MinGW or
recompiling Qt with Microsoft Visual Studio, depending on which configuration you want to
use for your applications.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-using-qt-designer.html
\page creator-usability.html
\nextpage creator-building-running.html
\title Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices
Before starting application development, analyze and define the requirements, scope, and
functionality of the application to ensure efficient functionality and a smooth user
experience. Design the application for a single purpose and analyze how it can best serve
its users. Mobile devices have been designed for use when mobile. Keep the characteristics
of mobile devices in mind when you create applications for them.
The following guidelines help you design and develop usable applications for mobile devices
with varying characteristics, such as screen size and support for input methods:
\list
\o Know your users
Find out who will use the application, what they will use it for,
and which mobile devices they have. Then design the application to fit a specific context
of use.
\o Design for small screens
The screen size of mobile devices is significantly smaller
than that available on desktop devices. Carefully consider what is the most relevant
content to present on the application UI, as it might not be reasonable to try and fit as
much content into the screen as you might have in a desktop application.
\o Design for multiple screen sizes
Relate the position and size of each control to the
dimensions of the display. This enables the same set of information to be presented on the
screen in all resolutions; higher resolution devices just display finer graphics.
\o Design for changing screen orientation
Some devices support screen rotation. On these
devices, applications can be displayed in portrait or landscape orientation. Account for
orientation and dynamically adjust the display when the screen is rotated.
\o Design intuitive ways of moving within applications
Mobile devices lack a mouse and
full-size keyboard, so users must use the touch screen or five way navigation pad to move within
applications. In addition, many users control the devices with one hand. To create an optimized user
experience, allow users to access information with one click; do not make them scroll and type.
\o Design for limited input methods
Applications collect information from users on the task
at hand. In addition to touch screen input, some devices contain physical keys such
as a five way navigation pad, a keypad, and a keyboard. Users enter information by using screen
controls, such as lists, check boxes, radio buttons, and text fields.
\o Keep response times short
Latency can cause delays in user interaction. If users perceive
an application as being slow, they are likely to get frustrated and stop using it.
\o Save battery time
Mobile devices are not constantly connected to a power source but run on
battery power. Optimize power consumption to keep the total consumption at an acceptable
level and to prevent users from running out of battery time.
\o Consider network issues
If users do not have a flat-rate data plan or WLAN support, mobile
network connections cost them money. Also, when users move around with the devices, the networks
available for connections constantly change.
\o Remember the processing limits of the device
The memory available on devices is limited
and you should use it carefully. Although all mobile devices have common functionality,
each device is individual in terms of both the resources available and extra features.
Therefore, you must consider the constraints of all the target devices.
\endlist
For more information about user experience techniques for mobile devices, see the
\l{http://library.forum.nokia.com/topic/Design_and_User_Experience_Library/GUID-A8DF3EB8-E97C-4DA0-95F6-F464ECC995BC_cover.html}{Design and User Experience Library}
on Forum Nokia.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-faq.html
\page creator-tips.html
\nextpage creator-known-issues.html
\title Tips and Tricks
\section1 Switching Between Modes
Qt Creator uses different modes for different purposes. You can quickly
switch between these modes with the following keyboard shortcuts:
\list
\o \gui Welcome mode \key Ctrl+1
\o \gui Edit mode \key Ctrl+2
\o \gui Design mode \key Ctrl+3
\o \gui Debug mode \key Ctrl+4
\o \gui Projects mode \key Ctrl+5
\o \gui Help mode \key Ctrl+6
\endlist
For more information about Qt Creator modes, see \l {Qt Creator Modes}.
\section1 Moving Between Open Files
To quickly move between currently open files, press
\key Ctrl+Tab.
To move forward in the location history, press \key {Alt+Right}
(\key {Cmd+Opt+Right} on Mac OS). To move backward, press \key {Alt+Left}
(\key {Cmd+Opt+Left} on Mac OS). For example, if you use the \gui Locator
to jump to a symbol in the same file, you can jump back to your original
location in that file by pressing \key {Alt+Left}.
\section1 Moving To the Edit Mode
To move to the \gui Edit mode and currently active file, press
\key Esc.
If you already are in the \gui Edit mode:
\list
\o The first press moves focus to the editor
\o The second press closes secondary windows
\endlist
\section1 Using the Filter in Options Dialog
To find specific settings you require in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...}
use the filter located at the top left of the \gui Options dialog box.
\section1 Opening Output Panes
The output panes provide a list of errors and warnings encountered during
a build, detailed output from the compiler, status of a program when it is
executed and debug output, as well as search results.
To open output panes, use the following shortcuts:
\list
\o \gui{Build Issues} pane Alt+1 (Cmd+1 on Mac OS X)
\o \gui{Search Results} pane Alt+2 (Cmd+2 on Mac OS X)
\o \gui{Application Output} pane Alt+3 (Cmd+3 on Mac OS X)
\o \gui{Compile Output} pane Alt+4 (Cmd+4 on Mac OS X)
\endlist
For more information about output panes, see \l{Viewing Output}.
\section1 Using Keyboard Shortcuts
Qt Creator provides \l{Keyboard Shortcuts}{many useful keyboard shortcuts}.
You can see the keyboard shortcut for a menu command in the menu
or the tooltip for a button.
To customize, import or export keyboard shortcuts, select \gui Tools >
\gui Options... > \gui Environment > \gui Keyboard.
\section1 Running Qt Creator From Command Line
You can launch Qt Creator from command line using the name of an
existing session or \c .pro file by giving the name as the command
argument.
For example, running \tt{qtcreator somesession}, launches Qt Creator and
loads session somesession.
\note Make sure Qt Creator is included in the PATH environment variable.
This can be done by typing the following in the command line:
\code
set PATH=c:\qtsdk\mingw\bin;c:\qtsdk\qt\bin;%PATH%
\endcode
\section1 Showing and Hiding the Sidebar
To toggle the sidebar in the \gui Edit and \gui Debug modes, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-togglebutton.png
or press \key Alt+0 (\key Cmd+0 on Mac OS X).
For more information on using the sidebar, see \l {Browsing Project Contents}.
\section1 Moving To Symbols
To move straight to a symbol used in a project, select the symbol in the
\gui Editor toolbar drop-down menu. For more information on the editor toolbar,
see \l {Using the Editor Toolbar}.
To jump to a symbol in the current file, press \key {Ctrl+K} to open the
\gui Locator, enter a period (.), and start typing the symbol name. Then
select the symbol in the list. For more information on using the locator,
see \l{Searching With the Locator}.
Press \key Ctrl (\key Cmd on Mac OS) and click a symbol to move directly to
the definition or the declaration of the symbol. You can also move the cursor
on the symbol and press \key {F2}. For more information, see
\l{Moving to Symbol Definition or Declaration}.
\section1 Displaying Signals and Slots
If an instance of a class is derived from QObject, and you would like to
find all other objects connected to one of your object's slots using
Qt's signals and slots mechanism, select \gui Tools > \gui Options...
> \gui{Debugger} > \gui{Debugging Helper} > \gui{Use Debugging Helper}.
In the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view, expand the object's entry and open
the slot in the \e slots subitem. The objects connected to this slot are
shown as children of the slot. This method works with signals too.
For more information about the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view, see
\l{Locals and Watchers}.
\section1 Displaying Low Level Data
If special debugging of Qt objects fails due to data corruption within the
debugged objects, you can switch off the debugging helpers. When debugging
helpers are switched off low-level structures become visible.
To switch off the debugging helpers:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Debugger >
\gui{Debugging Helper}.
\o Uncheck the \gui{Use Debugging Helper} checkbox.
\endlist
\section1 Showing Tooltips in Debug Mode
To inspect the value of variables from the editor, you can turn
on tooltips. Tooltips are hidden by default for performance reasons.
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Debugger > \gui General.
\o Select the \gui {Use tooltips in main editor while debugging} check box.
\endlist
When you hover over a variable in the code editor in \gui Debug mode, a
tooltip is displayed. To keep the tooltip visible, click the pin button.
You can expand pinned tooltips to view their full content.
\image qtcreator-pin-tooltip.png
Pinned tooltips are stored in the session. To close all pinned tooltips,
select \gui {Close Editor Tooltips} in the context menu in the \gui {Locals
and Watchers} view.
\section1 Locating Files
The \gui Locator provides one of the easiest ways in Qt Creator to browse
through projects, files, classes, methods, documentation and file systems.
To quickly access files not directly mentioned in your project, you can
create your own locator filters. That way you can locate files in a
directory structure you have defined.
To create locator filters, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Locator > Add}.
For more information, see \l{Creating Locator Filters}.
\section1 Adding a License Header Template for C++ Code
A file containing a license header for C++ can be specified under
\gui{Tools > Options... > C++ > License Template}. It may contain special
placeholders enclosed in \c{%%} that are replaced when generating a
new file:
\list 1
\o \c %YEAR%: Year
\o \c %MONTH%: Month
\o \c %DAY%: Day of the month
\o \c %DATE%: Date
\o \c %USER%: User name
\o \c %FILENAME%: File name
\o \c %CLASS%: Class name (if applicable)
\o \c %$VARIABLE%: Contents of environment variable \c{VARIABLE}.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-cli.html
\page creator-keyboard-shortcuts.html
\nextpage creator-faq.html
\title Keyboard Shortcuts
Qt Creator provides various keyboard shortcuts to speed up your development
process.
\section1 Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts
To customize a keyboard shortcut:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Environment >
\gui Keyboard.
\o Select an action from the list.
\o In \gui{Key Sequence} enter the shortcut key you want to associate
with the selected action.
\endlist
Qt Creator allows you to use different keyboard shortcut mapping schemes:
\list
\o To import a keyboard shortcut mapping scheme, click \gui Import
and select the kms file containing keyboard shortcut mapping scheme
you want to import.
\o To export the current keyboard shortcut mapping scheme, click
\gui Export and select the location where you want to save the
exported kms file.
\endlist
\section1 Default Keyboard Shortcuts
The following tables list the default keyboard shortcuts. They are
categorized by actions.
\section2 General Keyboard Shortcuts
\table
\header
\o Action
\o Keyboard shortcut
\row
\o Open file or project
\o Ctrl+O
\row
\o New file or project
\o Ctrl+N
\row
\o Open in external editor
\o Alt+V, Alt+I
\row
\o Cut
\o Ctrl+X
\row
\o Copy
\o Ctrl+C
\row
\o Paste
\o Ctrl+V
\row
\o Redo
\o Ctrl+Y
\row
\o Save
\o Ctrl+S
\row
\o Save all
\o Ctrl+A
\row
\o Close window
\o Ctrl+W
\row
\o Close all
\o Ctrl+Shift+W
\row
\o Go back
\o Alt+Left
\row
\o Go forward
\o Alt+Right
\row
\o Go to line
\o Ctrl+L
\row
\o Next open document in history
\o Ctrl+Shift+Tab
\row
\o Goto other split
\o Ctrl+E, O
\row
\o Previous open document in history
\o Ctrl+Tab
\row
\o Activate \gui Locator
\o Ctrl+K
\row
\o Switch to \gui Welcome mode
\o Ctrl+1
\row
\o Switch to \gui Edit mode
\o Ctrl+2
\row
\o Switch to \gui Design mode
\o Ctrl+3
\row
\o Switch to \gui Debug mode
\o Ctrl+4
\row
\o Switch to \gui Projects mode
\o Ctrl+5
\row
\o Switch to \gui Help mode
\o Ctrl+6
\row
\o Toggle \gui{Build Issues} pane
\o Alt+1 (Cmd+1 on Mac OS X)
\row
\o Toggle \gui{Search Results} pane
\o Alt+2 (Cmd+2 on Mac OS X)
\row
\o Toggle \gui{Application Output} pane
\o Alt+3 (Cmd+3 on Mac OS X)
\row
\o Toggle \gui{Compile Output} pane
\o Alt+4 (Cmd+4 on Mac OS X)
\row
\o Activate \gui Bookmarks pane
\o Alt+M
\row
\o Activate \gui{File System} pane
\o Alt+Y
\row
\o Activate \gui{Open Documents} pane
\o Alt+O
\row
\o Activate \gui Projects pane
\o Alt+X
\row
\o Full screen
\o Ctrl+Shift+F11
\row
\o Toggle the sidebar
\o Alt+0 (Cmd+0 on Mac OS X)
\row
\o Undo
\o Ctrl+Z
\row
\o Move to \gui Edit mode
In \gui Edit mode:
\list
\o The first press moves focus to the editor
\o The second press closes secondary windows
\endlist
\o Esc
\endtable
\section2 Editing Keyboard Shortcuts
\table
\header
\o Action
\o Keyboard shortcut
\row
\o Auto-indent selection
\o Ctrl+I
\row
\o Collapse
\o Ctrl+<
\row
\o Expand
\o Ctrl+>
\row
\o Trigger a completion in this scope
\o Ctrl+Space
\row
\o Copy line down
\o Ctrl+Alt+Down
\row
\o Copy line up
\o Ctrl+Alt+Up
\row
\o Cut line
\o Shift+Del
\row
\o Join lines
\o Ctrl+J
\row
\o Decrease font size
\o Ctrl+- (Ctrl+Roll mouse wheel down)
\row
\o Increase font size
\o Ctrl++ (Ctrl+Roll mouse wheel up)
\row
\o Toggle Vim-style editing
\o Alt+V, Alt+V
\row
\o Split
\o Ctrl+E, 2
\row
\o Split side by side
\o Ctrl+E, 3
\row
\o Remove all splits
\o Ctrl+E, 1
\row
\o Remove current split
\o Ctrl+E, 0
\row
\o Select all
\o Ctrl+A
\row
\o Go to block end
\o Ctrl+]
\row
\o Go to block start
\o Ctrl+[
\row
\o Go to block end with selection
\o Ctrl+}
\row
\o Go to block start with selection
\o Ctrl+{
\row
\o Move current line down
\o Ctrl+Shift+Down
\row
\o Move current line up
\o Ctrl+Shift+Up
\row
\o Trigger a quick fix in this scope
\o Alt+Return
\row
\o Rewrap paragraph
\o Ctrl+E, R
\row
\o Select the current block
The second press extends the selection to the parent block
\o Ctrl+U
\row
\o Enable text wrapping
\o Ctrl+E, Ctrl+W
\row
\o Toggle comment for selection
\o Ctrl+/
\row
\o Visualize whitespace
\o Ctrl+E, Ctrl+V
\row
\o Delete
\o Del
\row
\o Adjust size
\o Ctrl+J
\row
\o Lay out in a grid
\o Ctrl+G
\row
\o Lay out horizontally
\o Ctrl+H
\row
\o Lay out vertically
\o Ctrl+L
\row
\o Preview
\o Alt+Shift+R
\row
\o Edit signals and slots
\o F4
\row
\o Edit widgets
\o F3
\row
\o Toggle bookmark
\o Ctrl+M
\row
\o Go to next bookmark
\o Ctrl+.
\row
\o Go to previous bookmark
\o Ctrl+,
\row
\o Fetch snippet
\o Alt+C, Alt+F
\row
\o Paste snippet
\o Alt+C, Alt+P
\row
\o Find usages
\o Ctrl+Shift+U
\row
\o Follow symbol under cursor
Works with namespaces, classes, methods, variables, include
statements and macros
\o F2
\row
\o Rename symbol under cursor
\o Ctrl+Shift+R
\row
\o Switch between method declaration and definition
\o Shift+F2
\row
\o Open type hierarchy
\o Ctrl+Shift+T
\row
\o Switch between header and source file
\o F4
\endtable
\section2 Debugging Keyboard Shortcuts
\table
\header
\o Action
\o Keyboard shortcut
\row
\o Start debugging
\o F5
\row
\o Stop or interrupt debugger
\o Shift+F5
\row
\o Reset debugger
\o Ctrl+Shift+F5
\row
\o Step over
\o F10
\row
\o Step into
\o F11
\row
\o Step out
\o Shift+F11
\row
\o Toggle breakpoint
\o F9
\row
\o Run to selected function
\o Ctrl+F6
\endtable
\section2 Project Keyboard Shortcuts
\table
\header
\o Action
\o Keyboard shortcut
\row
\o Build project
\o Ctrl+B
\row
\o Build all
\o Ctrl+Shift+B
\row
\o New project
\o Ctrl+Shift+N
\row
\o Run
\o Ctrl+R
\endtable
\section2 Help Keyboard Shortcuts
\table
\header
\o Action
\o Keyboard shortcut
\row
\o View context-sensitive help
\o F1
\row
\o Activate contents in \gui Help mode
\o Ctrl+T
\row
\o Add bookmark in \gui Help mode
\o Ctrl+M
\row
\o Activate index in \gui Help mode
\o Ctrl+I
\row
\o Reset font size in \gui Help mode
\o Ctrl+0
\row
\o Activate search in \gui Help mode
\o Ctrl+S
\endtable
\section2 Version Control Keyboard Shortcuts
\table
\header
\o {1,2} Action
\o {5,1} Version control system
\header
\o CVS
\o Git
\o Perforce
\o Subversion
\o Mercurial
\row
\o Add
\o Alt+C, Alt+A
\o Alt+G, Alt+A
\o
\o Alt+S, Alt+A
\o
\row
\o Commit
\o Alt+C, Alt+C
\o Alt+G, Alt+C
\o
\o
\o Alt+H, Alt+C
\row
\o Diff
\o Alt+C, Alt+D
\o Alt+G, Alt+D
\o
\o Alt+S, Alt+D
\o Alt+H, Alt+D
\row
\o Diff project
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+Shift+D
\o Alt+P, Alt+D
\o
\o
\row
\o Blame
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+B
\o
\o
\o
\row
\o Log
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+L
\o Alt+P, Alt+F
\o
\o Alt+H, Alt+L
\row
\o Log project
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+K
\o
\o
\o
\row
\o Status
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+S
\o
\o
\o Alt+H, Alt+S
\row
\o Undo changes
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+U
\o
\o
\o
\row
\o Diff project
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+Shift+D
\o Alt+P, Alt+D
\o
\o
\row
\o Edit
\o
\o
\o Alt+P, Alt+E
\o
\o
\row
\o Opened
\o
\o
\o Alt+P, Alt+O
\o
\o
\row
\o Revert
\o
\o
\o Alt+P, Alt+R
\o
\o
\row
\o Submit
\o
\o
\o Alt+P, Alt+S
\o
\o
\endtable
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-known-issues.html
\page creator-glossary.html
\nextpage creator-acknowledgements.html
\title Glossary
\table
\header
\o Term
\o Meaning
\row
\o
\raw HTML
Qt in PATH
\endraw
\target glossary-system-qt
\o This is the Qt
version for the \c qmake command found in your \c PATH
environment variable.
This is likely to be the system's Qt version.
\row
\o
\raw HTML
Project Qt
\endraw
\target glossary-project-qt
\o The version of Qt configured in the \gui{Projects} mode, \gui {Build
Settings}, \gui {Qt Version} field. This is the Qt version that
is actually used by a particular project.
\row
\o
\raw HTML
Shadow build
\endraw
\target glossary-shadow-build
\o Shadow building means building a project in a separate
directory, the \e{build directory}. The build directory is
different from the source directory. One of the benefits of
shadow building is that it keeps your source directory clean.
Shadow building is the best practice if you need many build
configurations for a single set of source.
\endtable
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-tips.html
\page creator-known-issues.html
\nextpage creator-glossary.html
\title Known Issues
This section lists known issues in Qt Creator version 2.2.0.
The development team is aware of them, and therefore, you do not need to
report them as bugs.
For a list of fixed issues and added features, see the changelog file in
the \c{qtcreator\dist} folder or the \l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com}{Qt Bug Tracker}.
\section1 General Issues
\list
\o If you change the Input Languages in Windows, Qt Creator might not
respond for 30 seconds. This is a known issue in the Advanced Text
Service of Microsoft Windows.
\o Qt Creator uses SQLite for storing some of its settings. SQLite is
known to have problems with certain NFS servers (most notably the
nfs-user-server 2.2beta), since they can lock up the application
when it tries to lock the database. If your home directory is on an
NFS share and you encounter this issue, one option would be to
switch to the nfs-kernel-server, or create a symlink so that the
settings are stored locally.
\o The Okteta KDE custom widget plugin might be installed as part of
some Linux distributions. It can cause Qt Designer to crash. For
more information, see:
\list
\o \l{https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/kdeutils/+bug/662005}{Ubuntu bug 662005}
\o \l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com/browse/QTBUG-12025}{QTBUG-12025}
\endlist
To resolve the issue, enter the following command to remove the package:
\code
sudo apt-get remove okteta
\endcode
Or delete the following file:
\c /usr/lib/kde4/plugins/designer/oktetadesignerplugin.so.
\endlist
\section1 Editing Issues
\list
\o Code completion does not support typedefs for nested classes.
\endlist
\section1 Projects Issues
\list
\o Paths or file names containing spaces or special characters
(such as colons, dollar signs, and hash marks) may cause problems. This
is because some of the tools Qt Creator uses in the background have
restrictions on the characters allowed in file and directory names.
To be on the safe side, we recommend creating projects and project
items with names consisting of plain characters, numbers,
underscores, and hyphens.
\o Creating new CMake projects with Qt Creator is not supported.
\o Building and packaging subprojects is not supported for Maemo devices.
\o You must create projects for Maemo targets on the same partition where
you installed \QSDK, Qt Creator, and MADDE.
\o If error messages displayed in the \gui {Compile Output} pane contain
paths where slashes are missing (for example, C:QtSDK),
check your PATH variable. For more information, see
\l{Troubleshooting MinGW Compilation Errors}.
\endlist
\section1 Debugging Issues
\list
\o Debugging large applications on Symbian devices using the Symbian^3
operating system might not work, because the on-device debugging agent
might not be able to
access memory when the operating system starts paging. This causes breakpoint
handling and symbol resolution to fail. For more information, see
\l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com/browse/QTCREATORBUG-2158}{QTCREATORBUG-2158}.
As a workaround, add the following section to the application .pro file to
disable paging:
\code
debug {
MMP_RULES -= PAGED
MMP_RULES *= UNPAGED
}
\endcode
\note You must completely clean and rebuild the project for the setting to
take effect.
\o When debugging executables created by the GNU Compiler version 4.5.0
(all platforms), some data types will not be displayed in the
\gui{Locals and Watchers} view due to missing debug information.
\o GDB on Windows may not work if the 'Embassy \reg Security Center' software
by 'Wave \reg Systems' is installed and active (causing crashes in \c{vxvault.dll)}).
\o GDB may take long to load debugging symbols, especially from large
libraries.
\o Setting breakpoints in code that is compiled into the binary more
than once does not work.
\o Setting breakpoints in files that do not have unique absolute
paths may fail. For example, remounting parts of a file system
using the --bind mount option.
\endlist
\section1 Qt Quick Designer Issues
\list
\o \QMLD uses external processes (QML Puppet) to render and preview
images and to collect data. Executing C++ code might cause the QML
Puppet to crash. If it crashes, an error message is displayed and
you can continue editing the QML file in the code editor.
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-glossary.html
\page creator-acknowledgements.html
\title Acknowledgements
\section1 Third-party Components
Qt Creator contains the following third-party components:
\list
\o \bold{Open Source front-end for C++ (license MIT)}, enhanced for use in
Qt Creator.\br
Roberto Raggi \br
QtCreator/src/shared/cplusplus\br\br
\o \bold{Botan, a C++ crypto library. Version 1.8.8}\br
\list
\o Copyright (C) 1999-2004 The Botan Project. All rights reserved.
\o Copyright (C) 1999-2009 Jack Lloyd
\o 2001 Peter J Jones
\o 2004-2007 Justin Karneges
\o 2005 Matthew Gregan
\o 2005-2006 Matt Johnston
\o 2006 Luca Piccarreta
\o 2007 Yves Jerschow
\o 2007-2008 FlexSecure GmbH
\o 2007-2008 Technische Universitat Darmstadt
\o 2007-2008 Falko Strenzke
\o 2007-2008 Martin Doering
\o 2007 Manuel Hartl
\o 2007 Christoph Ludwig
\o 2007 Patrick Sona
\endlist
All rights reserved.\br\br
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:\br\br
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.\br\br
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.\br
\br
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) OR CONTRIBUTOR(S) BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.\br\br
The source code of Botan C++ crypto library can be found
here:
\list
\o QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty
\o \l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-creator/qt-creator/trees/master/src/libs/3rdparty}
\endlist
\br\br
\o \bold{NetSieben SSH Library is a Secure Shell client library for C++.
Version 1.3.2}\br
\list
\o \bold{Commercial License:} For organizations who do not want to
release the source code for their applications as open source/
free software; in other words they do not want to comply with the
GNU General Public License (GPL) or Q Public License.
\o \bold{Non Commercial / Open Source License:} NetSieben believes in
contributing back to the open source community, thus it has released
the SSH Library under Q Public License as it is defined by Trolltech
AS of Norway. The Open Source License allows the user to use software
under an open source / free software license, and distribute it
freely. The software can be used at no charge with the condition
that if the user uses the SSH Library in an application they wish to
redistribute, then the complete source code for your application must
be available and freely redistributable under reasonable conditions.
For more information on the used QPL License see:
QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty/net7ssh/LICENSE.QPL
\endlist\br\br
The source code of NetSieben Secure Shell C++ Library can be found
here:
\list
\o QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty
\o \l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-creator/qt-creator/trees/master/src/libs/3rdparty}
\endlist
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-mime-types.html
\page creator-task-lists.html
\nextpage creator-cli.html
\title Showing Task List Files in the Build Issues Pane
Code scanning and analysis tools create report files in ASCII format.
Usually, the report files consist of lines that contain a file name, a line
number, and an error message. A similar format is used for stack traces
obtained from crash reports. Traditionally, you would fix the errors by
manually navigating to them and correcting them, which is tedious.
Qt Creator makes this very easy by providing a way to load these files into
the \gui{Build Issues} pane. You can navigate to the corresponding source
code by clicking the error message. But first you must convert the files to
the \l{Task List File Format} by using conversion scripts that based on
standard text processing tools of the operating system.
In addition, you can generate task list files from code.
For an example of a script that checks new lines of code and matches them
against regular expressions to generate a task list, see \c{scripts\mytasks.pl}
in the Qt Creator repository.
To open task list files, choose \gui{File} > \gui{Open}.
\section1 Task List File Format
The filename extension must be .tasks for Qt Creator to recognize a file as a
task list file.
Each line in a task list file is treated as a tab-separated list of strings with
\c{\t}, \c{\n}, and \c{\\} used as escape characters. The strings are used to create
one task per line. The lines can have one of the following formats:
\list
\o \c description
\o \c{type\tdescription}
\o \c{file\ttype\tdescription}
\o \c{file\tline\ttype\tdescription}
\endlist
The task type can have one of the following values:
\list
\o A string starting with \c err, which displays the error icon in the beginning of the line
\o A string starting with \c warn, which displays the warning icon
\o Any other value, which sets the task type to Unknown and does not
display an icon
\endlist
The values are not case sensitive.
Lines starting with the hash mark character (#) in the first column are ignored.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-task-lists.html
\page creator-cli.html
\nextpage creator-keyboard-shortcuts.html
\title Using Command Line Options
You can start Qt Creator and specify some options from the command line.
For example, you can open a file to any line.
To specify command line options, enter the following command in the Qt Creator
installation or build directory:
\c {qtcreator [option] [filename[:line_number]]}
\note You can use either a colon (:) or a plus sign (+) as a separator
between the filename and line number. You can also use a space between the
separator and the line number.
For example:
\list
\o \c {C:\qtcreator\bin>qtcreator -help}
\o \c {C:\qtcreator\bin>qtcreator C:\TextFinder\textfinder.cpp:100}
\o \c {C:\qtcreator\bin>qtcreator C:\TextFinder\textfinder.cpp +100}
\endlist
The following table summarizes the available options:
\table
\header
\o Option
\o Description
\row
\o -help
\o Display help on command line options.
\row
\o -version
\o Display Qt Creator version.
\row
\o -client
\o Attempt to connect to an already running instance of Qt Creator.
\row
\o -noload
\o Do not load the specified plugin.
\row
\o -profile
\o Output plugin start up and shut down profiling data.
\row
\o -settingspath
\o Override the default path where user settings are stored.
\row
\o -color
\o Core plugin: override the selected UI color.
\row
\o -disable-cdb
\o Debugger plugin: disable the Microsoft Console Debugger (CDB)
engine. For more information, see \l{Debugging}.
\row
\o -disable-gdb
\o Debugger plugin: disable the GNU Symbolic Debugger (GDB) engine.
\row
\o -disable-sdb
\o Debugger plugin: disable the Qt Script debugger engine.
\row
\o -debug
\o Debugger plugin: attach to process ID or core file.
\row
\o -wincrashevent
\o Debugger plugin: Attach to crashed processes by using the specified
event handle.
\row
\o -customwizard-verbose
\o ProjectExplorer plugin: display additional information when loading
custom wizards. For more information about custom wizards, see
\l{Adding New Custom Wizards}
\row
\o -lastsession
\o ProjectExplorer plugin: load the last session when Qt Creator starts.
Open the projects and files that were open when you last exited Qt Creator.
For more information about managing sessions, see \l{Managing Sessions}.
\endtable
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-maemo-emulator.html
\page creator-mime-types.html
\nextpage creator-task-lists.html
\title Editing MIME Types
Qt Creator uses the
\l{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Internet_media_type}{Internet media type}
(MIME type) of the file to determine which mode and editor to use for
opening the file. For example, Qt Creator opens C++ source and header files
in the C++ editor, and Qt widget based UI files (.ui) in \QD.
To identify the MIME type of a file, Qt Creator uses matching by pattern
and matching by contents. First, Qt Creator looks at the filename to check
whether it matches the patterns specified for any MIME type. If no match is
found, it checks the contents of the file for magic headers specified for the
file.
The magic headers can contain text strings or bytes. The type of the
header value, string or byte, determines how Qt Creator interprets the
value. Qt Creator searches for the value within a specified
range in the files and takes the priority of the magic header into account.
If you specify wide search ranges, openging files in Qt Creator might take
a long time. Therefore, you are advised to use the recommended values for
the range and priority of the magic header.
If your files do not match the predefined MIME types, you can edit the
MIME types to add filename extensions and magic headers. You cannot
add new MIME types, however.
To edit MIME types:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Environment > MIME Types}.
\image qtcreator-mime-types.png "MIME Types"
\o In \gui {MIME Type}, select a MIME type.
\o In \gui Patterns, add the filename extension for the type of files
that you want to identify as having this MIME type.
\o Click \gui Add to add \gui {Magic Headers}.
\image qtcreator-mime-types-magic-header.png "Magic Header"
\o In the \gui Value field, specify a text string or bytes that
appear in the files.
\o In the \gui Type field, select the type of the value.
\note You are recommended not to change the range and priority, because
it might cause problems when opening files in Qt Creator.
\o Click \gui OK.
\endlist
To revert all the changes you have made to the MIME type definitions,
select \gui {Reset All}.
\note If you now select \gui OK or \gui Apply, you permanently lose all
your own patterns and magic headers. The changes are reverted the next
time you start Qt Creator.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-analyzer.html
\page creator-troubleshooting-debugging.html
\nextpage creator-deployment.html
\title Troubleshooting Debugger
This section lists some typical problems that you might encounter while
debugging and solutions to them.
\section1 Cannot Launch Debugger
Some anti-virus applications do not allow debuggers to retrieve data. For
example, on Windows, launching the debugger might fail with the following
message if the Avira AntiVir is installed on the development PC: \e{The
inferior stopped because it received a signal from the operating system.
Signal name:? signal meaning: Unknown signal.}
Some versions of Avira AntiVir Desktop-Products contain known issues in
various development environments, including Qt Creator. To fix the problem,
Avira instructs you to update to version \c {avipbb.sys 10.0.22.22}. For
more information, see
\l{http://www.avira.com/en/support-for-business-knowledgebase-detail/kbid/805}{Restricted Usability of IDE/Debuggers since 2010-12-08}.
\section1 Debugger Does Not Hit Breakpoints
You might have created a release build that does not contain debug
information. A GNU Compiler Collection (GCC) debug build has the \c {-g}
option on the compiler command line. Check that this option is present in
the \gui {Compile Output} pane. If it is not, adjust your build settings
in the \gui {Projects} mode.
\section1 Debugger Does Not Work
If the debugger does not work properly, try the following:
\list 1
\o Make sure you use at least Qt Creator 2.1.
\o Make sure the debugger is set up properly. For more information,
see \l{Setting Up Debugger}.
\o In the \gui Debug mode, select \gui {Windows > Views > Debugger
Log} to open the \gui {Debugger Log} view. Browse the contents of
the pane on the right hand side to find out what went wrong.
Always attach the contents of the pane to debugger-related
questions to the Qt Creator mailing list (qt-creator@trolltech.com)
or paste them to
\l{http://creator.pastebin.com}{creator.pastebin.com} before
asking questions in the IRC (on the #qt-creator channel at
FreeNode).
\endlist
\section1 Pointer Variable Members Are Not Displayed Directly
When you use the \gui {Locals and Watchers} view to inspect a pointer
variable and expand the variable tree item, another tree item level
is displayed. To directly display the members of the pointer variable,
select \gui {Dereference Pointers Automatically} in the context menu in the
\gui {Locals and Watchers} view.
\section1 Built-in Debugger Is Slow During Startup and Runtime
The Qt Creator for Windows installation packages install GDB from MinGW.
Unfortunately, GDB is quite slow on Windows. Qt Creator does not cause
this, as it interacts with GDB and adds custom dumpers for Qt types.
\note You can use Qt Creator with MSVC on Windows for debugging.
\section1 Debugger Displays Message
The message is created by the debugging helpers. Qt Creator posts an
expression to the GDB command line to invoke the debugging helpers.
The expression includes the address of the object to examine. This
address might be modified by GDB before the helper function is called. It
is unclear why and when this happens, but if it happens, the debugging
helpers operate on wrong data and come to wrong conclusions. Most likely,
they find garbage and declare the variable to be .
\section1 Application Crashes when Debugging on Mac OS X Snow Leopard
You must use a workaround to use the DYLD_IMAGE_SUFFIX option in the
\gui Projects tab on Mac OS X Snow Leopard. For more information on the
issue, see
\l{http://wimleers.com/blog/dyld-image-suffix-causing-havoc-on-mac-os-x-snow-leopard}{DYLD_IMAGE_SUFFIX causing havoc on Mac OS X Snow Leopard}.
To use the option, enter the following commands in the Terminal
application:
\code
sudo mv /usr/lib/libSystem.B_debug.dylib /usr/lib/libSystem.B_debug.dylib.backup
sudo cp /usr/lib/libSystem.B.dylib /usr/lib/libSystem.B_debug.dylib.backup
\endcode
\section1 Debugger Cannot Attach to Running Process on Linux
GDB uses \c ptrace to attach to running processes. Some Linux distributions
do not allow this, which stops all attempts to either directly attach to an
existing process or use the \gui {Run in terminal} option in Qt Creator.
The reasons for this are described in
\l{https://wiki.ubuntu.com/SecurityTeam/Roadmap/KernelHardening#ptrace%20Protection}{KernelHardening}.
However, the usefulness of this security measure seems dubious,
because this feature can be easily disabled. With root permissions, you can
disable the feature immediately by writing \c{0} into
\c{/proc/sys/kernel/yama/ptrace_scope}. Even if you do not have elevated
permissions, you can disable the feature later by adding a library that
calls \c{prctl(0x59616d61, getppid(), 0, 0, 0);}, such as the one in
\c{$QTCREATORDIR/lib/libptracepreload.so} to the LD_PRELOAD environment.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debugging-qml.html
\page creator-analyzer.html
\nextpage creator-troubleshooting-debugging.html
\title Detecting Memory Leaks
You can use the Memcheck tool included in the
\l{http://valgrind.org/info/tools.html}{Valgrind tool suite} to detect
problems that are related to memory management in applications.
\note Memcheck is supported on Linux and Mac OS.
After you download and install Memcheck, you can use it from Qt Creator.
To analyze applications, select \gui {Debug > Start Analyzer > Start}.
While the application is running, Memcheck checks all reads and writes of
memory and intercepts calls that allocate or free memory or create or
delete memory blocks.
If problems are found, they are listed in the \gui Analysis output pane.
Select a link to move to the problematic code.
\image analyzer_issues.png "Analysis output pane"
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-help.html
\page creator-advanced.html
\nextpage creator-os-supported-platforms.html
\title Advanced Use
Qt Creator attempts to meet your development needs, whether you are an
experienced Qt developer or a newcomer to Qt. When you install Qt Creator
as a part of \QSDK, the default configuration allows you to start coding,
building, running and debugging applications with very little effort.
However, you can easily change or extend the default configuration, by
choosing a different build system, adding project wizards, integrating
external tools, or editing the standard MIME types that Qt Creator uses
to recognize your files.
You can start Qt Creator and specify some options for running it from the
command line.
This following topics describe advanced use of Qt Creator:
\list
\o \l{Operating Systems and Supported Platforms}
\o \l{Adding New Custom Wizards}
\o \l{Setting Up a CMake Project}
\o \l{Setting Up a Generic Project}
\o \l{Using Version Control Systems}
\o \l{Adding Qt Designer Plugins}
\o \l{Using External Tools}
\o \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}
\o \l{Editing MIME Types}
\o \l{Showing Task List Files in the Build Issues Pane}
\o \l{Using Command Line Options}
\o \l{Keyboard Shortcuts}
\o \l{Glossary}
\endlist
*/